visable.png

Entreprises 1210 SAINT-JOSSE-TEN-NOODE -Mars-2015-Belgique

Entreprises 1210 SAINT-JOSSE-TEN-NOODE -Mars-2015-Belgique INTEL sur FNAC.COM  - Horaires de levée du courrier en Belgique

- Revenir à l'accueil

visable.png

ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->

 

 

 

1210 SAINT-JOSSE-TEN-NOODE : Les Contes de Violaine Assurtou Sterck A Gestion Assurances Et Prêts De Smedt et Charlier Charlier Jean-Claude Les AP Takkariste Ahmed Calipa Coaching Coaching Livia Nemeth Ges-Team Warge M Hadi A Juleight Atlas fisk

 

1060 SAINT-GILLES : A la Ombre de la Lumière Crab Jean et ses Fils Office Central des Assurés H.P.P. Assurances I-PARTNER Jasoing A Redasco R.E.X. NGANDU OLIVIER Triangle Partners Cedar Street Partners Belgium Cygnes Assurés Ntougas M Heuze Goubau P Simescu Mihaela-Creola Didier Gonin et Associates Le Coach Groupe de Gestion OROBI ADEGOKE Delhove H Coenen Ch Cogitax Lefebvre O C.D.C. Sellier P Verboomen R Hanquet M Global-Fisc De Keyser C Consultia SCCS Miklòs Zoltàn Toussaint J Stéphane Vander Elst et Associés soc.civ. Giron L Hourman P

 

NEDER-OVER-HEEMBEEK : Busschaert-Autowand V.D.V. Conseil Mues Alexis MV Group Boucquey F.Vertik Access

 

1080 MOLENBEEK-SAINT-JEAN : Sobelmar-Credit Amal Dellah I De Gunst Louis Rentinsur BGA Basit Insurance D'Haeyer C Verzek. Vancoppenolle Haegeman Assurances Monique Leclercq Feguigui De Knijf-Greven et Co Bükk-Assur Fin Shop Certum Benassur Quartier T.i.j.s. La Forêt en Ville Les Mains Vertes Positive Insight De Ripainsel Eric Blanche colombe Covaci Management Solutions Boukarssou S Fisco Comptable Consult Ifkirin S Difisco scris M.S.B. Tax et Accountancy Yucom

 

1020 LAEKEN : Adelphe Rachem S Wynsberghe Phelco Asi Alev Bureau Van Buggenhoudt A.G.A. De Beys C Yellow Brick, Coaching et Training Score Ten Rowi

 

1081 KOEKELBERG : François R et JP Moiny J Trouman et Partners Kante M Decat Patrick Sherman G Saerens De Bouvere C Fonck G Fisc-Compta Pro Reno Assist Consult scrl AIEC

 

1090 JETTE : Eurosun Pint Christian Bureau Associates Taverniers Anneet Gerard et Co Efia Mercelis Brokers Bureau Massart Van Ranst Marc G.A.M. Crédits Nijs J M.S.B. Finance G A M Plaisir Vert O'Green Delval Lelia Complétude Coaching Horizon Coach Stepforcareer

 

1050 IXELLES : Europ Car Centre Garage Automobile Art et Lumière Christophe de Diesbach Abat-Jour Tagoli Amazone DECO WOOD D'Hoop Dominique et Cie Mot-Dehon et Partners Blue Insurance De Wouters Associés Hautfenne J-C Croze William FINEUS Gestinsure Guilmain et Berco Asvedec Diel Roland Delhaye Ph Lavand'Homme et de Borrekens Honoré et Fils Vansalen P C.A.E. Groupassur Bruxelles Metlife Insurance Chartis Europe Limited DRA Insurance Brokers SZYGOWSKI CEA Belgium Emelinckx Y Shelter Family Office Felis et Associés Coché J OPPALFENS ROLANDE CARINE Dauby et Abel Kawa Conseil DEBORSU ALAIN Excel Brokers Vandepaer et Fils Logé Th Assur 2000 Irimia Petru-Aurelian Clinckemaille M Pettens Alexis Vue d'en Haut Les Jardins de Boondael Jardinia Terra Nova Greenexpress Qoach'In Team 42 Psycho Sport Coach'n'Roll Estellita Eduardo Human Resources Development Academy Blaimont Florence Résonances Notté Pol Positive Monday Attitude Sortir du Lot La Plénitude Centre d'Etude de Réflexologie Kichouh Hamid Sanchez F Gharbi L Vanderhaegen A ACF L.T.M. Advisors Eric Loiseau Comptabilité Vandermeuter N Expertia EXFI Befiscom Daali M Hubens J-P Vander Elst A Van Hecke E Thubron Christopher BST Services D'Aspremont Lynden F Fiscalex Consult Pajot D Fidutile Hauptman Florani J-C Compta-Fisca DMC Van De Winkel et Partners SPRL Ak T Vossaert E Logical Fiduciaire France Provost Ch Bureau B.C.A. Institut Professionnel des Comptables et Fiscalist Lenaers J-P Ayed Y Peeters Y Roosevelt Consulting Firm MFG ADG SPRL

 

1083 GANSHOREN : Bibo-Assur Rijavec Jonathan Assist.Entrep.Assur. Secur.Soc.Urb. Lawalrée D Lavender Laurent Isselee P Osmose J.S. SERVICES sprl Logistica Comptaplus Consulting

 

1190 FOREST : Editions Auto-Magazine Lesne G Markanne Mardon Beling et Associates Beling M Van Duynen Assurances Nicole Flemal Van Keymeulen A Gielis et Associés Eeckman Art et Insurance Cadcorp sprl Assure K et S Assurances Duyzings Uytters-Ass sa Hostens M Bureau Meraini Cabinet d'Assurances et Financements Darchambeau-Sobelfia Mossoux Roger et Co Dehon et Fils SGPA Laheyne Patrick Assurances Au Jardin du bois Giovannini Nicola Coach'ur Self Chalude and Associates Hirth Laurent Marcelle Fabienne Gustot D Arickx C Engels V Finantra Mahieu M Grandhenry and Partners scris B G F C Bureau Comptable F.I.G. Defrene M Lammouchi Ch

 

1140 EVERE : Sophraline Vanhove David Acofisco Groupe Schoos F Finance et Accounting Management Streignard A Azarkan A Duquennois M Mohimi S EB Consulting E&B Consulting

 

1040 ETTERBEEK : Goosse Abat-Jour Artho Jaenen Pascal Eurocreta Service Allianz SE Vanest Belgian Risk Management IC Verzekeringen Smart Plan Product et Services Support Assur-Infor Eurogestion Syn Brokers Losange - D'Hondt Payen Vincent Ponet Assurances C.D.C.A. ASSURNAT DTH Finance Dupal Vincent Uytters Bureau Van Zuylen G Assurances de Behault et Boulanger Assurement sprl Axa Banque-Brodheim Invest et Insurance Manneback Valérian Iziplus Lievyns Th Dagnely RH Coaching-Impact Scholz et Friends Berlin Carloni Sandrine Psychosport TIMMERS SYLVIE Feng Shui Consulting Alter Egau Colour Harmonie Cobry Lemercinier G Hang-Van U-N Bofidi Brussels De Jaegher F Testa G Pyxis.be Lequeux F Wilschrey Geulette D Jemine A Bernard J Bathi A.B. Fisco

 

1000 BRUXELLES : A.B. Blaes Le Siffleur UH Finance Fopa Sob Lionel Romero Amigo Michael Havaux D Insurance Europe Canivet J-M Petra Investments QBE Re (Europe) Ltd - Secura Branch Garanti Finance ERGO AAA Capitalfin Partnership Protection et Pension Specific Insurance et Risk Fintro Bruxelles-Wavre Elitis Bruxelles S A A G MSIG Insurance Europe Verbraeken, Vandewal, Aché et Co Pressur Sobelco Zenito B et R Service Odeurs Mühlebach et Cie-OMC RGF Groupe (Bruxelles) Abelift Alixon Van Wetter Arbretaille ABCvert.be Orenbach Simon The Performance Coach Belgium Sohail Ali Xiraki Stella-Maria MPV-One Devriendt Veerle GAD Savels Steve Unique You Institute Institut-Mindfulness Helpigo Body to Soul Rosier N Trullemans O Schneider Jan Bureau d'Etudes Wendrickx J-C Conac-Administratie B.C.T.H. Sorgeloos Fiducis Finance and Accounting Management Torelli B Nconsult Cavalieri C Regie Constellation Rabai A Voorzorgskas Ciku R Dehaene R Sulaj Bekim El Bakali A Fiscalift Atarhouch Finacct Bettens E Fiduciaire Comptable et Fiscale MJ Grupp W

 

 

1082 BERCHEM-SAINTE-AGATHE S.C.S Verbesselt Wathelet Y Flora Ets Delval St Aux 4 Vents Ginion G Viavectis Molon C La Placa Maria

 

1160 AUDERGHEM : Abarth Econom Car A. Dumane Supercar Martin et Vandermeulen Sykora Igor Picron M Smets Cédric AON Belgium NV/SA COMPTE INVEST BV GROUP ASSURFINANCES MSIG Corporate Service Eur.Limited Vanbreda Risk et Benefits Catry Christian Webb Daniel Consult Inter Brokers Huyberechts Co Vanhuffel et Co Viaxis Viaxis VDM Sarl Geneve Bureau Assurances Services Orgassim Arbres et Jardins Pro Gardener Depiesse Luc (Synaxis sprl) Extend Coaching Tshouly Concept MNJ Coaching Thais Sander Yfis Allan D Biquet M Bugeti Tilmans E Carlton P Serficom Lindemann I Barbieaux P Barbieaux Comptabilité Swaelens P Optimax Rousseeuw L MBM Cogeval Graulich T A.D.S. Sauvaget A Sempoux D Vandersteen J Collin O T.C.F. et Associates Coutinho Pinto R Vandamme P Asacompta Vivier R Entreprises-1070-ANDERLECHT-Mars-2015-Belgique : Saad African Cars Export Dewilde Motor et Co Japan Cars-Jorez Bruynseels Jugnon Assurances Bureau Wilca Abelmo Centre Hypothécaire d'Assurances et de Prêts De Staercke et Associés Crelan Louckx et Partners Louckx J Assurances S Olsen et Co K et Co Consulting FAVAZZA DIDIER Vander Haegen Jc Lauwaert M Verschelden Steda Management MARTIN VICTOR JEAN Jugnon Assurances Jugnon Assurances Jugnon Assurances Jugnon Assurances Elagage et Jardin Authentique Lalemant P Le But Spitaels O Arborisens C.P.M. Garden-Loos J.M.R.L. JardiSud Bio-Relooking Body Style FD Coach Camilia Transforming Talent Transforming Talent Talent Coaching for Kids Mnasri Sonia Tvist Upledger Instituut Belgium K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. Bourguignon S Fiduciaire Bourguignon Art-Consult scri Bertha S Fiduciaire des Classes Moyennes Fiduciaire des Classes Moyennes Ben Ali M Woters M El Hallabi K JP Mornard Chartered DB et Cie K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. K finances Di Maggio G Makoudi (Fiduciaire) Fiduciaire d'Hoedt BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l. Goficom s.c. p.r.l. BRAINE-L-ALLEUD : Agreassur Point Vert Service Rue Jules Cockx 12A Avenue Général Dumonceau 56 Chaussée de Mons 668 Chaussée de Wavre 1354 Chaussée de Wavre 1261 Chaussée de Mons 707 Avenue Georges Henri 295 Chaussée de Wavre 245 Chaussée de La Hulpe 225 Chaussée de Mons 511 Chaussée de Saint-Job 771A Val des Seigneurs 4 3 Ninoofse Steenweg 568 Chaussée de Vilvorde 104 Rue de la Montagne 84 Zone Industrielle de l'Europe 10 Boulevard Paul-Henri Spaak 6 Rue de la Tulipe 16 Rue de la Limite 14 Avenue Georges Henri 317 Rue Blaes 137 Rue des Tanneurs 141 Avenue du Prince de Ligne 149 Avenue Louis Gribaumont 40 Rue du Maraîcher 28 Chaussée Saint-Pierre 328 Rue Pierre Hap-Lemaître 43 Rue Mareyde 21 Chaussée de Charleroi 168 Rue de Dublin 36 Chaussée Saint-Pierre 328 Avenue d'Auderghem 324 Rue Pierre Hap-Lemaître 43 Rue Mareyde 21 Rue Geleytsbeek 87 Avenue de Saturne 25 Koningin Astridlaan 483 A Chaussée de Waterloo 653 Cantersteen 47 Chaussée de Charleroi 214-216 Rue Jacques Jansen 17 Boulevard Brand Whitlock 114 Avenue Edouard Speeckaert 140 Boulevard Sylvain Dupuis 239 1 Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6 Rue Paul Lauters 58 Place Georges Brugmann 8 Rue François Vekemans 117 Chaussée de Mons 1071 Rue d'Arlon 36 Rue Colonel Bourg 107 3 Rue Hector Denis 54 Place Eugène Keym 7 Place Edouard Pinoy 7 Avenue Franklin Roosevelt 143 Avenue de la Foresterie 2 Avenue Léon Jourez 9 Rue Froissart 119 Rue Franklin 17 Avenue des Arts 27 Rue Sainte-Gertrude 16 Rue Franklin 112 Rue d'Arlon 36 Rue Montoyer 51 Place des Gueux 14 Avenue de l'Yser 31 Rue de la Pacification 2 Rue du Noyer 312 Rue Caroly 29 Square de Meeûs 37 Rue du Commerce 72 Rue du Trône 146 Avenue Milcamps 59 Boulevard du Régent 37 Chaussée de Louvain 362 Rue Verbist 77 Rue Saxe-Cobourg 5 Rue de Linthout 120 Avenue des Arts 12 Avenue des Arts 12 Chaussée de Wavre 627 Avenue de l'Opale 25 7 Avenue Milcamps 95ETRC Chaussée de Wavre 692 Avenue de Tervueren 34 40 Boulevard Bischoffsheim 1-8 Avenue de Tervueren 46 Avenue du Diamant 45 Avenue du Diamant 69 Avenue de Roodebeek 58 3 Rue Jacques Jansen 17 Square Eugène Plasky 111 19 Square Eugène Plasky 107 Rue du Congrès 20 Avenue de l'Opale 124 1 Boulevard Brand Whitlock 155 7 Rue Royale 132 3 Square Vergote 38 Avenue de l'Armée 103 Rue de Tervaete 27 Boulevard Auguste Reyers 67 Rue de Pervyse 22 Boulevard Brand Whitlock 84 2 Avenue Hansen-Soulie 71 Rue Royale 194 Avenue Général Bernheim 18 AVENUE Avenue Galilée 5B Boulevard Brand Whitlock 58 Avenue Prekelinden 167 20 Avenue Prekelinden 167 20 Rue du Prince Royal 81 Boulevard Saint-Michel 89 Boulevard Louis Schmidt 96 B19 Avenue de Tervueren 187 Boulevard de l'Impératrice 56 Rue Gachard 37 Boulevard Louis Schmidt 53 Rue Dautzenberg 44 Avenue Louise 230 Rue Royale 233 Rue Van Dyck 14 ETRC Rue Guillaume Stocq 29 Rue du Duc 94 Rue du Duc 94 Rue du Duc 94 Rue du Duc 94 Rue du Duc 94 Chaussée de Charleroi 13 Avenue Nestor Plissart 26 Avenue Louise 221 Place de la Reine 20 Place de la Vieille Halle aux Blés 47 Place de la Reine 16 Rue Cardinal Lavigerie 54 Rue Baron de Castro 77 Rue du Houyoux 12 Avenue de Tervueren 206 1 Avenue de Février 30 Rue Colonel Bourg 112 8 Avenue Louise 287 Rue du Châtelain 22 Avenue Louise 303 3 Rue Defacqz 80 Avenue Géo Bernier 2 Rue Armand Campenhout 63 Avenue de Tervueren 273 9 Rue de la Cambre 180 Rue de l'Automne 59 Rue de l'Automne 59 Rue de l'Automne 59 Rue de l'Automne 59 Boulevard de la Plaine 11 Boulevard de la Plaine 11 Avenue Général de Longueville 8 10 Avenue des Jardins 60 Clos de la Licorne 15 Rue Royale Sainte-Marie 142 Rue Joseph Brand 108 Avenue Voltaire 178 Rue de Tournai 6 Rue de Tenbosch 94 Rue du Zéphyr 59 Avenue Henri Jaspar 122 Avenue du Paepedelle 85-9 Chaussée de Haecht 342 Avenue de la Folle Chanson 15 16 Rue du Tabellion 66 Rue du Mont-Blanc 37 Allée des Freesias 1 129 Chaussée de Wavre 1251 Avenue de Broqueville 272 8 Rue Saint-Georges 30 Rond-Point de l'Etoile 5 27 Avenue Ernestine 2 15 Avenue des Eperviers 117 B033 Rue Crocq 32 Rue de l'Hôtel des Monnaies 101 Rue des Hellènes 40 4 Avenue du V-Day 26 B032 Avenue de la Couronne 435000 Rue Guillaume Kennis 10 Chaussée de Waterloo 323 Chaussée de Waterloo 323 Quai du Batelage 11 Cité Fontainas 8 1 Avenue Paul Hymans 21 Rue Vondel 92 Avenue des Anciens Combattants 82 1 Avenue Louis Lepoutre 51 Avenue Paul Hymans 47 Avenue de Tervueren 296A 2 Avenue Henry Dunant 23 Avenue Maréchal Foch 68 Rue Lincoln 32 Quai de Willebroeck 37 Oud-Strijderslaan 111 29 Avenue Molière 339 Avenue Molière 339 Avenue Paul-Henri Spaak 1 Avenue Paul-Henri Spaak 7 Avenue Henri Conscience 100 3 Rue Louis Hymans 45 Chemin des Deux Maisons 61 6 Rue Jules Cockx 8-10 Chemin des Deux Maisons 71 29 Boulevard Lambermont 154 Chaussée de Helmet 161 Avenue A. J. Slegers 21 Avenue Henri Conscience 136 Avenue Paul Hymans 105 38 Avenue Paul Hymans 105 38 Avenue de la Nielle 235 Rue Paul Wemaere 4 Chaussée d'Alsemberg 106 Avenue Vandromme 34 Avenue Brugman 124 Avenue du Martin Pêcheur 48 40 Chaussée de Haecht 843 Rue Edouard Deknoop 62 Avenue du Martin Pêcheur 23-25 Avenue du Martin Pêcheur 19 Avenue des Mûriers 27 Avenue Armand Huysmans 180 3 Avenue Albert 15 Rue de Fiennes 69 Avenue Montjoie 33 4 Avenue Albert 149 Avenue Albert 149 Avenue Franklin Roosevelt 90 Avenue Winston Churchill 190 14 Avenue du Roi 21A Avenue Winston Churchill 192 13 Avenue de la Charmille 14 25 Avenue Albert 168 Avenue Jupiter 191 Avenue Jupiter 187 11 Rue du Gruyer 50 Avenue Winston Churchill 176 Boulevard Léopold II 88 9 Boulevard Léopold II 108 Square Servaas Hoedemaekers 22 12 Rue Vanderkindere 179 Avenue du Bois de la Cambre 115 Boulevard de la Woluwe 62 Rue Iwan Gilkin 7ET04 Square Servaas Hoedemaekers 18 Avenue Winston Churchill 118A Chaussée de Helmet 389 Chaussée de Helmet 389 Avenue Reine Maria-Henriette 116 Avenue Montjoie 293 1 Avenue Montjoie 169 8 Avenue Jules Génicot 5 Place Eugène Keym 18 Rue Anatole France 96 Rue des Etangs Noirs 26 Avenue Maurice Maeterlinck 60 Avenue Franklin Roosevelt 134 8 Avenue Brugmann 256 Rue Marconi 167 5 Boulevard du Souverain 360 Boulevard du Souverain 360 Chaussée de Wavre 1705 Avenue Jupiter 147 Boulevard Leopold II 216 Avenue Marcel Thiry 82 13 Rue Berthelot 106-108 17 Jules Bordetlaan 160 8 Rue René Magritte 24 Avenue Zénobe Gramme 86 Boulevard du Souverain 159 Rue de Paris 45A Avenue de Messidor 202 Rue Neerveld 57-6 Avenue Jupiter 109A 5 Avenue Everard 49 Avenue du Mistral 17 Avenue Everard 18 Avenue Louis Jasmin 56 Rue de Bonne 18 Boulevard du Souverain 125 Boulevard du Souverain 125 Avenue des Briqueteries 5 Place de l'Altitude Cent 1 Avenue Jean Dubrucq 147 Rue Léon Fourez 8 Rue du Château Kieffelt 20 Dries 54 Rue Antoine Clesse 23 Avenue Brugmann 355 Rue du Melon 34 Chaussée de Stöckel 231 11 Rue Honoré Longtin 48 Rue Ketels 22 Avenue de la Ferme Rose 3 Rue du Pannenhuys 22 Chaussée de Waterloo 1135 Avenue des Tritons 31 2 Rue Spruyt 20 Rue Konkel 200 2 Rue Eugène Degorge 26 Avenue De Fré 139 Avenue Van Volxem 264 Boulevard du Souverain 51 17 Avenue Edmond Parmentier 207 Avenue du Cerf Volant 14 Avenue Herrmann-Debroux 40-42 Avenue Herrmann-Debroux 40 Avenue Jean Burgers 3 18 Avenue Herrmann-Debroux 17-19 Avenue Brugmann 328 15 Avenue Neptune 43 4 Drève des Deux Moutiers 7 Avenue Odon Warland 109 Avenue Coghen 166 Rue du Gulden Bodem 45 Boulevard Jules Graindor 8 Avenue du Geai 44 Chaussée de Jette 479 2 Avenue de l'Observatoire 114 Drève du Renard 10 Avenue Charles Woeste 180 Avenue de la Raquette 11 Boulevard Edmond Machtens 61 7 Boulevard Edmond Machtens 61 Rue des Artistes 58 Chaussée de La Hulpe 110 Avenue Alfred Madoux 34 Chaussée de Waterloo 1110 Rue du Doyenné 18 Chaussée de Stockel 371 Chaussée de Waterloo 1163 Avenue du Panthéon 50 Avenue du Pérou 77 Avenue du Karreveld 73 1 Chaussée de Gand 463 Avenue de Jette 165 Avenue de Jette 165 Avenue Paul De Merten 14 Chaussée de Waterloo 1174-1176 Square Edmond Machtens 17 Square Edmond Machtens 17 Avenue des Sittelles 44 Rue Roosendael 114 Boulevard du Souverain 36 2 Boulevard Edmond Machtens 89 Avenue du Domaine 49 8 Avenue de la Paix 61 4 Boulevard du Souverain 2 Rue Wayez 190 De Formanoirstraat 28 Rue de Formanoir 28 Avenue du Duc Jean 24 Boulevard de Smet de Naeyer 189 Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6 Rue Alphonse Asselbergs 104 Avenue du Duc Jean 21 2 Rue Edouard Gersis 30 Avenue Victor-Emmanuel III 61 Rue de Veeweyde 19 Place de la Vaillance 34 Place de la Vaillance 34 Avenue Albert Lancaster 9 Drève des Shetlands 6 8 Avenue de la Faisanderie 49 Chaussée de Wemmel 55 Avenue du Château 30 1 Avenue du Panthéon 90 2 Rue de Bruges 11 Avenue de Biolley 24 Avenue de l'Escrime 99 Drève des Mustangs 8 Drève des Mustangs 8 Rue au Bois 500 Rue Jean Van Lierde 2 Rue de Veeweyde 119 Avenue Jean et Pierre Carsoel 118 16 Avenue Jean et Pierre Carsoel 118 16 Avenue des Croix du Feu 159 B002 Rue Colonel Chaltin 81 1 Chaussée de Waterloo 1335 Boulevard de Smet de Naeyer 383 Ninoofse Steenweg 563 Avenue du Vossegat 37 7 Rue Van Wambeke 32 Avenue du Haras 142 Avenue des Crocus 11 Rue de la Métairie 20 Avenue Charles Quint 30 2 Rue des Maraîchers 11 Avenue de la Basilique 325 Avenue du Roi Albert 79 Chaussée de Saint-Job 412 Boulevard Edmond Machtens 157 59 Boulevard Louis Mettewie 260 Chaussée d'Alsemberg 816 Avenue de la Foresterie 2 Boulevard Louis Mettewie 487 15 Avenue de Haveskercke 137 Avenue Houba de Strooper 74 Avenue Houba de Strooper 74 Avenue Houba de Strooper 74 Rue du Camp 14 Rue Zeyp 19 Place Peter Benoit 15 K Cantersteen 47 Grand'Place 6 Boulevard Sylvain Dupuis 239 1 Boulevard du Souverain 2 Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6 Square Eugène Plasky 92-94 Cantersteen 47 Boulevard Sylvain Dupuis 239 1 Avenue René Gobert 14 6 Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6 Avenue Edouard Speeckaert 140 Avenue de la Couronne 311 8 Cantersteen 47 Boulevard Sylvain Dupuis 239 1 Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6 Cantersteen 47 Avenue de l'Université 32 1E Boulevard Sylvain Dupuis 239 1 Avenue de la Chasse 180 Chaussée d'Alsemberg 1235 Rue du Monastère 42 Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6 Avenue René Comhaire 65 Dieweg 89 Avenue de l'Idéal 56 Rue du Potaerdenberg 181 Rue d'Espagne 105 Chaussée d'Alsemberg 1045 Nilleveldstraat 60 Rue Saint-Sébastien 31 Avenue Docteur Decroly 52 Rue du Bourdon 35 Rue Gustave Fuss 25 Rue du Vivier 110 Rue du Cornet 65 Rue Le Corrège 39 Square Marguerite 1 31 Rue du Noyer 175 Place Saint-Pierre 38 Rue Borrens 51 1 Rue Artan 13 Avenue Ernest Cambier 4 Avenue de l'Equinoxe 37 Avenue A. J. Slegers 169 Avenue du Frioul 8 14 Avenue des Frères Legrain 111 Rue Joseph Wauters 80 Rue des Fortifications 30 Avenue des Merles 15 Place de Ninove 3 Rue Franz Merjay 68 1 Chaussée de Boondael 574 Rue Antoine Bréart 118 Rue de la Station de Woluwe 80 Avenue du Bois de la Cambre 199 Rue du Laekenveld 11 Rue Louis Jasmin 37 Avenue Edmond Parmentier 248 Avenue de Tervueren 420 Chaussée de Wavre 1967-1969 Rue Jakob Smits 101 Avenue François Folie 26 27 Avenue des Grands Prix 134 Rue Alphonse et Maurice Hellinckx 3 Avenue Théo Verbeeck 3 Rue du Château Beyaerd 137 Rue Mercator 30 Sint-Martinuskerkstraat 54 Avenue Josse Goffin 125 Avenue Mutsaard 74 41 Avenue de la Libre Académie 52 Rue du Bourdon 35 Rue de Linkebeek 1 Rue du Vieux-Moulin 66 Rue du Blanc Ry 63 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Rue des Bons Enfants 22 Chaussée de Tubize 63 Rue du Tilleul 127 Josse Biesmansstraat 24 Avenue Jules Malou 61 Rue Lanfray 19 Rue d'Espagne 105 Avenue Jean-François Debecker 31 A000 Avenue des Ajoncs 18 Rue des Primeurs 81 Chaussée de Stockel 377 Chaussée de Mons 574 Avenue Josse Goffin 153 Rue Marlène Dietrich 25 Rue de Percke 99 Avenue des Sorbiers 21 Rue de Moranville 64 Avenue André Drouart 48 Chaussée d'Alsemberg 1393 Rue Pierre Schlosser 7 Rue Bois des Iles 24 Rue Paloke 105 Avenue Louis Bertrand 41 Rue du Noyer 175 Rue du Village 29 Rue Kelle 156 Rue Commandant Ponthier 110 Chaussée d'Ixelles 52 2E Avenue du Lac 87 Rue du hameau 1E Rue de Trois Arbres 16B Avenue Louise 193 Rond-Point Robert Schuman 6 5 Rue Belliard 12 Rue Le Corrège 20 Rue des Boers 21 Rue Wappers 5 Rue Général Capiaumont 25 Chaussée de Wavre 99 Rue Ernest Solvay 30 Rue Général Gratry 74 Rue Nothomb 42 Avenue du Front 14 Avenue de l'Opale 119 Avenue de l'Armée 63 11 Rue des Petits Carmes 24 CB54 Chaussée de Boondael 40 Rue Adolphe Mathieu 64 Avenue Louise 475 15 Avenue Louise 480 Rue du Bois de Linthout 46 Rue Verte 2A 32 Rue François Roffiaen 1 Rue François Roffiaen 34 Rue de l'Est 26 Boulevard Anspach 17 48 Rue de Belle Vue 28 1 Rue Georges Matheus 2 Rue de l'Aurore 4 Rue du Grand Hospice 3A Avenue Charles Brassine 50 3 Rue Emmanuel Hiel 35-4 Avenue Ernestine 7 Avenue du Suffrage Universel 29 Rue Fernand Neuray 48 M000 Rue d'Alost 7 Avenue du Haut-Pont 1 1 Chaussée de Mons 25 Quai des Péniches 58 62 Rue de la Bougie 37 13 Rue du Chimiste 34 Avenue Henri Strauvens 1 B011 Avenue Eugène Demolder 119 Rue de Ribaucourt 135 Avenue de Calabre 4 Avenue Jacques Brel 34 B20 Rue de l'Application 62 Avenue de la Héronnière 100 19 Rue Pierre Delacroix 13 Avenue de Messidor 213 Avenue Molière 25 1 Chaussée d'Alsemberg 350 Chaussée d'Alsemberg 350 Carré des Platanes 2 Avenue des Tritons 59 Avenue Van Volxem 299 Chaussée de Wavre 1763 Avenue De Fré 139 18 Rue au Bois 166 Avenue du Cor de Chasse 93 Rue Jacques Vandervleet 33 M-H Avenue Coghen 159 Rue Edmond Tollenaere 92 Rue du Moulin à Papier 96 Rue Victor Rauter 49 Avenue Paul De Merten 10 Drève du Sénéchal 30 Boulevard Edmond Machtens 172 Montagne de Saint-Job 76 A Avenue Van Crombrugghe 118 Clos du Drossart 6 Parvis Sainte-Alix 39 B002 Boulevard Maria Groeninckx-De May 74 Boulevard Maria Groeninckx-De May 74 Dieweg 54 1 Avenue Gisseleire Versé 26 Eugène Ysayelaan 33 Avenue Waxweiler 45 Rue Emile Heylens 17 Boulevard Théo Lambert 56 4 Avenue des Frères Becqué 38 Avenue Jan Verdoodt 7 M-H Place du Bourgmestre J. L. Thys 3 2B Rue du Tir 14 Chaussée de Waterloo 788 Avenue Marcel Thiry 60 B04 Rue Auguste Van Zande 81 Rue Guillaume Kennis 21 Chaussée de Saint-Job 309 Rue Général Leman 32 Rue Le Titien 7 Avenue Roger Vandendriessche 19 Chaussée de Waterloo 715 31 Rue Marianne 29 Place Eugène Keym 41 Avenue des Eoliennes 2 Rue du Champ de la Couronne 21 Avenue de Biolley 47 Avenue Jacques de Meurers 107 Avenue Pieter Goedefroy 2 B6 Chaussée d'Alsemberg 842 Théo Lambertlaan 13 Rue de Theux 103 Rue Emile Banning 105 Rue Auguste Van Zande 81 Avenue des Cerisiers 47 Rue Emile Deroover 45 M000 Rue Frans Pepermans 72 Avenue Molière 55 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Chaussée Saint-Pierre 105 1 Chaussée de Wavre 273 Rue Philippe le Bon 34 37 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Rue Goffart 82 Rue Goffart 82 Avenue Léon Mahillon 33 Chaussée Saint-Pierre 387 Chaussée Saint-Pierre 387 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Chaussée de Louvain 30 Chaussée de Louvain 30 Rue Marcel Mariën 6 ET02 Rue Philippe Baucq 138B Tervurenlaan 32 Avenue de Roodebeek 44 Rue des Moissons 26 Avenue Adolphe Lacomblé 59-65 Avenue Adolphe Lacomblé 59 Rue Nothomb 38 Rue du Congrès 49 Rue des Bataves 10 Avenue Léon Mahillon 68 Rue Bâtonnier Braffort 28 Rue Bâtonnier Braffort 28 Rue de la Croix de Fer 53 Avenue Milcamps 167 Rue des Cultes 7 9 Rue des Cultes 7 Avenue Emile Max 116 Avenue Léon Mahillon 127 Rue Albert de Latour 8 Rue Maes 13-1 Square Vergote 19 Rue de Venise 77 Rue Traversière 103 Boulevard Auguste Reyers 207 5 Rue de l'Arbre Bénit 19 Boulevard Auguste Reyers 159 Avenue Eugène Plasky 164 Rue Général Fivé 9B Avenue Marie-José 172 Avenue de l'Armée 116 Avenue de l'Armée 116 Square Vergote 10B 13 Square Vergote 10B 13 Rue de Ligne 11 Boulevard Auguste Reyers 80 Rue de Ligne 11 Rue de Ligne 11 Rue Joseph Coosemans 107 Avenue de l'Emeraude 66 1 Rue Van Hammée 17 Avenue des Casernes 65 Rue Royale 117 Avenue Général Bernheim 18 3 Rue des Chevaliers 14 7 Rue des Chevaliers 14 Rue des Chevaliers 14 10 Place de la Patrie 43 Rue des Coteaux 85 1 Boulevard Saint-Michel 65 6 Boulevard Saint-Michel 65 Boulevard Saint-Michel 65 6 Avenue Dailly 50 Boulevard Saint-Michel 14 15 Rue de Ruysbroeck 90 Hippolyte Rolinpromenade 6 20 Avenue Rogier 188 Avenue Rogier 188 Avenue de la Toison d'Or 16 Rue Jean d'Ardenne 67 Chaussée de Haecht 51 Rue Paul Devigne 108 Rue Paul Devigne 108 Rue Paul Devigne 108 Rue Paul Devigne 108 Rue des Coteaux 136 Rue Frans Binjé 30 Rue Dautzenberg 36-38 Rue Dautzenberg 36 Rue Thiéfry 69 Rue Thiéfry 69 Avenue Jan Stobbaerts 99 Avenue Louise 453 9 Avenue Louise 179 Avenue Louise 486-5 Avenue Louise 349 1 Avenue Louise 304 5 Avenue Louise 326 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue du Castel 58 Avenue du Castel 58 Avenue de Mai 288 Rue Gachard 88 14 Rue Gachard 88 14 Avenue de Tervueren 237 Avenue de Tervueren 237 Rue Juliette Wytsman 88 Rue Vilain XIIII 8 Place de la Vieille Halle aux Blés 29 Rue Paul Bossu 7 Avenue Louise 272 Avenue du Castel 2 Avenue du Castel 2 Avenue de Tervueren 204 Rue Baron de Castro 79 5 Avenue Louise 304 5 Rue du Duc 28 Chaussée de Roodebeek 521 Avenue Rogier 10 Avenue Rogier 10 Tenbos 18 9 Avenue des Volontaires 233 Avenue Herbert Hoover 253 Avenue Charles Madoux 13-15 Avenue Charles Madoux 13-15 Rue d'Ecosse 11 Rue d'Ecosse 11 Rue d'Ecosse 11 Rue Capouillet 63 RC Rue Saint-Bernard 11 5 Avenue de la Couronne 267 Avenue des Ombrages 1 22 Rue des Palmiers 34 Rue Verte 116 Avenue des Volontaires 327 21 Avenue des Volontaires 327 21 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue Louis Gribaumont 115-117 Rue Verte 133 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue du Couronnement 9 Avenue Roger Vandendriessche 81 Rue de l'Amblève 47 Rue de l'Amblève 47 Rue d'Ecosse 67 Rue d'Ecosse 67 Avenue Gustave Latinis 114 9 Avenue Frans Courtens 126 Chaussée de Haecht 271 Rue de Neufchâtel 28 Rue De Crayer 16 Rue De Crayer 16 Avenue Général de Longueville 4 Avenue Emile Duray 38 Rue Van Eyck 15 Rue Van Eyck 15 Chaussée de Vleurgat 213 Avenue de Stalingrad 14 Avenue de Stalingrad 14 Rue de la Victoire 168 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Avenue de la Couronne 548 1 Avenue des Saisons 111 Avenue des Saisons 111 Rue Africaine 60 Rue du Lavoir 43 Rue du Lavoir 43 Rue Africaine 60 Rue du Lavoir 43 Avenue Charles Gilisquet 81 Avenue Adolphe Buyl 64 Rue des Mélèzes 65 Avenue Charles Gilisquet 81 Rue du Tabellion 66 Rue Saint-Bernard 127 Avenue Edouard Speeckaert 19 5 Rue de l'Angle 2 Chaussée de Louvain 775 Boulevard d'Anvers 28 Rue Saint-Georges 32 Avenue Ernestine 1 Avenue Ernestine 1 Avenue Ernestine 1 Avenue Adolphe Buyl 73 Avenue Adolphe Buyl 73 Rue d'Irlande 18 Rue d'Irlande 18 Rue Rubens 85 Rue Colonel Bourg 127-129 Avenue des Eperviers 87 Avenue des Eperviers 87 Avenue des Eperviers 111 24 Avenue Louise 486 Rue De Praetere 12 Chaussée de Haecht 408 Avenue Guillaume Abeloos 2 Rue des Hellènes 40 4 Chaussée de Haecht 408 Rue de l'Hôtel des Monnaies 124A Chaussée de Waterloo 462 Chaussée de Wavre 1297 Chaussée de Waterloo 462 Rue des Trois Ponts 40 Rue des Palais 127 Rue des Palais 127 Avenue du Suffrage Universel 10 Rue de l'Hôtel des Monnaies 138 Rue Caporal Claes 6 15 Avenue de la Quiétude 22 Rue Vanderschrick 16 Quai du Commerce 18 Avenue Josse Smets 42 Chaussée de Roodebeek 291 Rue Froebel 3 Avenue A. J. Slegers 91 Rue de la Fôret d'Houthulst 3 20 Rue Guillaume Kennis 67 Avenue Jeanne 33 4 Rue du Kent 30 Rue du Kent 30 Rue du Kent 30 Avenue Legrand 45 Rue Théo Coopman 5 Rue Théo Coopman 5 Rue Colonel Bourg 158 1 Square Robert Goldschmidt 20 Rue d'Alost 7-11 Avenue Paul Hymans 28 Rue de Lombardie 14 Avenue Paul Hymans 28 Rue de Lombardie 14 Rue du Fort 46 Rue Henri Wafelaerts 22 Rue Henri Wafelaerts 22 Avenue des Loisirs 2 2 Avenue Louis Ceusters 26 2 Avenue Pierre Curie 23 Boulevard Lambermont 171 6 Boulevard Lambermont 171 6 Chemin des Deux Maisons 179 66 Avenue Molière 339 Place Guy d'Arezzo 17 8 Chemin des Deux Maisons 63 5 Chemin des Deux Maisons 61 10 Chemin des Deux Maisons 63 5 Chemin des Deux Maisons 63 5 Rue de la Cambre 16 Rue du Foyer Schaerbeekois 36 Avenue de Visé 86 Avenue Charles Thielemans 9 Avenue Charles Thielemans 9 Clos Bel Horizon 11 Rue François-Joseph Navez 55 Avenue Notre-Dame 47 Rue Vervloesem 53 Avenue Molière 295 Rue du Dahlia 21 2 Rue Richard Vandevelde 102 Rue du Dahlia 21 2 Rue de Danemark 28 Rue de l'Intendant 70 1 Avenue Sleeckx 14 Rue Brogniez 138 Rue Brogniez 138 Avenue de Tercoigne 18 Rue Nestor de Tière 5 Rue Nestor de Tière 5 Rue de l'Intendant 92 Rue Gabrielle 99 5 Rue Berkendael 99 Rue Berkendael 99 Avenue du Port 108-110 Boulevard des Invalides 36 Boulevard des Invalides 36 Rue de l'Instruction 126 Avenue Montjoie 57 Avenue Montjoie 57 Rue de l'Instruction 126B Avenue du Roi 40A Boulevard des Invalides 32 Avenue de la Sauvagine 9 23 Avenue de la Sauvagine 7 97 Rue Théodore De Cuyper 100 Avenue Winston Churchill 147 Rue Le Lorrain 110 Avenue Franklin Roosevelt 108 Luxor Parc 14 Boulevard de la Révision 24 13 Boulevard de la Révision 24 13 Boulevard de la Révision 24 17 Herzieningslaan 24 13 Rue du Loutrier 60 Rue Max Roos 28 13 Rue Théodore De Cuyper 165 36 Rue Frans Pepermans 81 Rue Edith Cavell 63A Avenue Maurice Maeterlinck 9 Rue Van Lint 25 Avenue Winston Churchill 87 Avenue Winston Churchill 87 Chaussée de Wavre 1572 Avenue Brugmann 228 Avenue Brugmann 228 Avenue de la Héronnière 90 4 Rue Houzeau de Lehaie 64 Avenue Tedesco 26 Avenue Tedesco 26 Avenue Tedesco 26 Avenue Winston Churchill 51 Avenue Winston Churchill 51 Avenue Winston Churchill 51 Avenue Marcel Thiry 79 Chaussée de Wavre 1574 1 Chaussée de Wavre 1574 1 Chaussée de Wavre 1574 1 Rue de la Vignette 179 3 Rue du Loutrier 13 Avenue Huart Hamoir 28 Rue Théophile Vander Elst 12 Rue Théophile Vander Elst 12 Rue de la Vignette 145 Square de Noville 8 32 Rue de la Vignette 145 Rue Cervantés 75 Rue Meyerbeer 48 Avenue du Derby 7 15 Rue Cervantés 68 Avenue Tedesco 5 Avenue Tedesco 5 Avenue Tedesco 5 Rue Neerveld 1 1 Rue des Vétérinaires 49 18102 Avenue Van Volxem 499 Rue Neerveld 1 1 Rue Jean-Baptiste Decock 17 Avenue du Mistral 28 Avenue du Mistral 28 Rue Picard 218 4 Rue Jean-Baptiste Bauwens 1 Rue Jean-Baptiste Bauwens 1 Rue Jean-Baptiste Bauwens 1 Boulevard Leopold II 214 Rue Meyerbeer 71 4 Place Princesse Elisabeth 11 Avenue de l'Aquilon 5 11 Avenue de l'Aquilon 5 Rue Vandernoot 18 Rue Vandernoot 18 Avenue du Bois de Sapins 2 Rue Georges Moreau 103 Boulevard du Jubilé 178A 3 Avenue du Cosmonaute 10 Chaussée de Bruxelles 400 2 Chaussée de Bruxelles 400 Chaussée de Bruxelles 400 2 Rue Meyerbeer 138B Avenue Van Volxem 402 Avenue Everard 30 Rue Gabrielle Petit 27 Rue Drootbeek 42 Rue Drootbeek 42 Avenue Marcel Thiry 11 2 Chaussée de Wavre 1680 2 Rue des Alliés 315 Avenue Marcel Thiry 22 16 Avenue Marcel Thiry 22 16 Avenue des Noisetiers 44 Avenue Marcel Thiry 16 18 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 Avenue Louise 306 Avenue Richard Mazza 7 Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5 Avenue de la Couronne 38 Avenue des Gaulois 3 Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23 Avenue de Tervueren 313 Rue Jakob Smits 123 Avenue Joseph Wybran 40 Avenue Charles Quint 30 Rue Georges Moreau 35 Rue Cornet de Grez 19 Avenue Clemenceau 87 4 Avenue du Château 58 Avenue Gounod 33 Avenue Gounod 33 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19 Avenue de la Renaissance 1 AUDERGHEM FOREST ANDERLECHT WOLUWE-SAINT-LAMBERT IXELLES WATERMAEL-BOITSFORT UCCLE WOLUWE-SAINT-PIERRE NEDER-OVER-HEEMBEEK HERSEAUX LEUZE-EN-HAINAUT SAINT-JOSSE-TEN-NOODE BRUXELLES BERCHEM-SAINTE-AGATHE ETTERBEEK SAINT-GILLES KRAAINEM BRUSSEL SCHAERBEEK JETTE EVERE "BRAINE-L'ALLEUD" MOLENBEEK-SAINT-JEAN KOEKELBERG LAEKEN GANSHOREN HAREN WAUTHIER-BRAINE HOEILAART OTTIGNIES QUENAST GENVAL Product Brief Intel® Edison Introduction The Intel® Edison development platform is designed to lower the barriers to entry for a range of inventors, entrepreneurs, and consumer product designers to rapidly prototype and produce “Internet of Things” (IoT) and wearable computing products. Intel® Edison Board for Arduino* Supports Arduino Sketch, Linux, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth. Board I/O: Compatible with Arduino Uno (except 4 PWM instead of 6 PWM): • 20 digital input/output pins, including 4 pins as PWM outputs. • 6 analog inputs. • 1 UART (Rx/Tx). • 1 I2C. • 1 ICSP 6-pin header (SPI). • Micro USB device connector OR (via mechanical switch) dedicated standard size USB host Type-A connector. • Micro USB device (connected to UART). • SD card connector. • DC power jack (7 to15 VDC input). Intel® Edison Breakout Board Slightly larger than the Intel® Edison module, the Intel® Edison Breakout Board has a minimal set of features: • Exposes native 1.8 V I/O of the Edison module. • 0.1 inch grid I/O array of through-hole solder points. • USB OTG with USB Micro Type-AB connector. • USB OTG power switch. • Battery charger. • USB to device UART bridge with USB micro Type-B connector. • DC power supply jack (7 to 15 VDC input). Intel® IoT Analytics Platform • Provides seamless Device-toDevice and Device-to-Cloud communication. • Ability to run rules on your data stream that trigger alerts based on advanced analytics. • Foundational tools for collecting, storing, and processing data in the cloud. • Free for limited and noncommercial use. Intel® Edison Development Platform Intel® Edison Development Platform Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked “reserved” or “undefined”. Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them. The information here is subject to change without notice. Do not finalize a design with this information. Contact your local Intel sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications and before placing your product order. Copies of documents which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or other Intel literature, may be obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725 or by visiting Intel’s website at http://www.intel.com/design/literature.htm. Intel processor numbers are not a measure of performance. Processor numbers differentiate features within each processor family, not across different processor families. See http://www.intel.com/products/processor_number for details. Intel, the Intel logo, Atom, Pentium, Quark, and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2014 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Please Recycle 331179-001 PHYSICAL Form factor Board with 70-pin connector Dimensions 35.5 × 25.0 × 3.9 mm (1.4 × 1.0 × 0.15 inches) max C/M/F Blue PCB with shields / No enclosure Connector Hirose DF40 Series (1.5, 2.0, or 3.0 mm stack height) Operating temperature 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C) EXTERNAL INTERFACES Total of 40 GPIOs, which can be configured as: SD card 1 interface UART 2 controllers (1 full flow control, 1 Rx/Tx) I2C 2 controllers SPI 1 controller with 2 chip selects I2S 1 controller GPIO Additional 12 (with 4 capable of PWM) USB 2.0 1 OTG controller Clock output 32 kHz, 19.2 MHz MAJOR EDISON COMPONENTS SoC 22 nm Intel® SoC that includes a dual-core, dual-threaded Intel® Atom™ CPU at 500 MHz and a 32-bit Intel® Quark™ microcontroller at 100 MHz RAM 1 GB LPDDR3 POP memory (2 channel 32bits @ 800MT/sec) Flash storage 4 GB eMMC (v4.51 spec) WiFi Broadcom* 43340 802.11 a/b/g/n; Dual-band (2.4 and 5 GHz) Onboard antenna or external antenna (SKU configurations) Bluetooth Bluetooth 4.0 POWER Input 3.3 to 4.5 V Output 100 ma @3.3 V and 100 ma @ 1.8 V Power Standby (No radios): 13 mW Standby (Bluetooth 4.0): 21.5 mW (BTLE in Q4-14) Standby (Wi-Fi): 35 mW FIRMWARE + SOFTWARE CPU OS Yocto Linux* v1.6 Development environments Arduino* IDE Eclipse supporting: C, C++, and Python Intel XDK supporting: Node.JS and HTML5 MCU OS RTOS Development environments MCU SDK and IDE Face 2 Niveaux de protection RAID 0+1 (entrelacé et en miroir) Nombre de disques : 4 Capacité nette avec quatre disques de 500 Go 1 To Entrelacement et écriture miroir. Les données sont entrelacées sur deux disques et écrites en miroir sur les deux autres. Les performances sont ainsi optimales et les données bien protégées. Entrelacement avec parité. Les données et les informations sur la parité sont réparties sur chaque disque de la matrice, offrant ainsi un équilibre parfait entre performances, tolérances aux pannes et utilisation de l’espace disque. Nombre de disques : 4 Capacité nette avec quatre disques de 500 Go 1,5 To RAID 5 (Parité) D4 D4 D4 D4 D4 D4 D4 D4 12 Connexion à votre système de stockage 1 Vous pouvez SOIT ouvrir la fenêtre de l’explorateur et saisir l’adresse IP de votre système de stockage, SOIT double-cliquer sur l’icône de votre bureau. Si un écran de blocage du contenu d’Internet Explorer s’affiche, cliquez sur Autoriser. Cliquez sur Ajouter dans l’écran Sites de confiance. Dans la page d’accueil, cliquez sur Log in to storage device (Connexion au périphérique de stockage). 3 2 4 Saisissez le nom d’utilisateur et le mot de passe. Cliquez sur Log In (Connexion) Vous avez maintenant terminé la configuration utilisateur basique de l’Intel® Entry Storage System SS4200-E. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration des utilisateurs et des dossiers partagés, reportez-vous au Manuel d’utilisation du logiciel de l’Intel® Entry Storage System SS4200-E. Pour plus d’informations sur la sauvegarde de votre système, reportez-vous à l’aide en ligne EMC* Retrospect Backup and Recovery (Sauvegarde et récupération rétrospective EMC). 11 Réalisation de l’installation Lorsque l’écran Congratulations (Félicitations) s’affiche, notez l’adresse IP puis cliquez sur OK. 1 Si vous avez choisi un autre nom que celui par défaut (storage) pour le dispositif, la page Restart Required (Redémarrage nécessaire) s’affiche. Cliquez sur Apply (Appliquer) pour redémarrer le système de stockage. Vous pouvez perdre momentanément votre connexion pendant ce laps de temps et devoir alors vous connecter au Device Manager (Gestionnaire de périphériques). 10 Configuration de la date/heure Sélectionnez un fuseau horaire dans la liste déroulante. Indiquez un serveur horaire OU saisissez manuellement une heure et une date. Pour utiliser le serveur horaire par défaut, cochez la case Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server (Synchroniser automatiquement avec un serveur horaire Internet) et sélectionnez Use the default time server (Utiliser le serveur horaire par défaut). Pour désigner un serveur horaire spécifique, cochez la case Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server (Synchroniser automatiquement avec un serveur horaire Internet) et sélectionnez Specify the time server (Désigner le serveur horaire). Entrez l’URL du serveur horaire Internet dans la zone de texte Server (Serveur) affichée. Pour désigner manuellement un serveur horaire spécifique, désélectionnez la case Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server (Synchroniser automatiquement avec un serveur horaire Internet) et saisissez la date actuelle (MM/JJ/AAAA), l’heure (hh:mm) ainsi qu’am ou pm dans les zones de texte affichées. Cliquez sur Apply (Appliquer) pour continuer. 2 1 3 Configuration de la notification par courrier électronique 9 (Facultatif) Saisissez une adresse électronique valide si vous voulez que le système vous envoie un message électronique en cas de problème. Cochez la case Additional Credentials Required (Authentifications supplémentaires requises) uniquement si votre réseau bloque le trafic SMTP ou nécessite des authentifications supplémentaires. (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Send a test email message (Envoyer un message électronique de test). Cliquez sur Next (Suivant) pour continuer. 1 2 3 Identification du système de stockage sur le réseau 8 2 1 3 Par défaut, le nom du système de stockage est « storage ». Vous pouvez conserver ce nom par défaut si vous le désirez. Saisissez un nom de dispositif pour le système de stockage. Ce nom vous permettra d’identifier le système sur le réseau. Saisissez un nom descriptif pour le système de stockage. Cliquez sur Next (Suivant) pour continuer. 7 Création d’un compte Administrateur Saisissez un nom d’utilisateur pour le compte Administrateur. Ce nom d’utilisateur peut contenir jusqu’à 32 caractères. Les espaces sont interdits. Créez un mot de passe pour le compte Administrateur. Pour plus de sécurité, choisissez un mot de passe comprenant 8 à 12 caractères. Les espaces sont interdits. Cliquez sur Next (Suivant) pour continuer. 1 3 2 6 Chargement du logiciel du système de stockage Sélectionnez I accept the terms of the License Agreement (J’accepte les termes de l’accord de licence) dans l’écran de l’accord de licence. Cliquez sur Next (Suivant) pour continuer. Sélectionnez l’emplacement d’installation puis cliquez sur Next (Suivant) pour continuer. Cliquez sur Install (Installer). Remarque : Sur les systèmes d’exploitation Apple* Macintosh, les écrans d’installation ont la même fonctionnalité, même si leur aspect est différent. Remarque : Il est recommandé de connecter le système de stockage à un réseau compatible DHCP pour procéder à l’installation du logiciel. Insérez le CD Resource livré avec votre Intel® Entry Storage System SS4200-E, dans un ordinateur connecté au même réseau que celui du système de stockage. Remarque : Si le CD Resource ne démarre pas automatiquement, parcourez ce CD et lancez manuellement le fichier install.exe. Le logiciel de gestion du système de stockage doit être installé sur un ordinateur connecté au même réseau que celui du système de stockage. Suivez les différentes étapes de l’Assistant d’installation. Sélectionnez Language (Langue) et cliquez sur OK pour continuer. 4 3 2 1 6 7 8 5 L’écran Installation complete (Installation terminée) s’affiche. Cliquez sur Done (Terminé). Le gestionnaire du système de stockage s’ouvre automatiquement dans l’explorateur. L’écran Welcome (Bienvenue) s’affiche. Cliquez sur Next (Suivant) pour lancer l’Assistant de configuration. Remarque : Si le gestionnaire ne détecte pas votre système de stockage, les instructions Hardware Setup (Configuration matérielle) s’affichent. Remarque : Lors de la tentative de connexion, Microsoft Internet Explorer* peut afficher un écran d’avertissement relatif au certificat de sécurité. Dans ce cas, cliquez sur Yes (Oui) ou Accept (Accepter) pour continuer. Unité de stockage Intel® Série DC S3500 Garantie limitée avec indicateur d'usure de support Intel garantit à l'acheteur du Produit spécifié ci-dessus dans son emballage d'origine scellé (« Acheteur originel ») et à l'acheteur d'un système informatique (contenant le Produit) conçu par un Acheteur originel (« Client du système originel ») ce qui suit : si le Produit est utilisé et installé correctement, il sera exempt de tout défaut matériel et de fabrication, et il sera généralement conforme aux spécifications rendues publiques par Intel pendant la « période de garantie », selon la période LA PLUS COURTE parmi ce qui suit : (A) PÉRIODE DE CINQ (5) ANS À PARTIR DE LA DATE D'ACHAT DU PRODUIT DANS SON EMBALLAGE SCELLÉ D'ORIGINE DANS LE CAS D UN ACHAT D’ORIGINE OU DE L’ACHAT D’ORIGINE D’UN ORDINATEUR CONTENANT LE PRODUIT DANS LE CAS D’UN SYSTÈME CLIENT D’ORIGINE ; OU (B) LA PÉRIODE SE TERMINANT À LA DATE À LAQUELLE L’UTILISATION DU DISQUE, MESURÉE PAR L’IMPLÉMENTATION PAR INTEL DE L’ATTRIBUT SMART E9 MEDIA WEAROUT INDICATOR (INDICATEUR D’USURE DU SUPPORT), ATTEINT UNE VALEUR NORMALISÉE DE « 1 ». L’attribut E9 (Media Wear-out indicator) est spécifié dans la fiche technique Intel du Produit. Un disque dur neuf et vierge indique une valeur Indicateur d'usure de support de 100 tandis qu'un disque ayant atteint ses limites d'utilisation en écriture affiche une valeur de 1. Si le Produit, objet de la présente garantie limitée, ne parvient pas à respecter la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel se propose, selon son appréciation, de :  RÉPARER le Produit par des méthodes matérielles ou logicielles, OU  REMPLACER le Produit par un autre OU, si Intel n'est pas en mesure de réparer ni de remplacer le Produit,  REMBOURSER le prix Intel du Produit au moment où la demande de service de garantie est déposée à Intel dans le cadre de cette garantie limité. CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE ET TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE POUVANT EXISTER D'APRÈS LES LOIS ÉTATIQUES, NATIONALES, PROVINCIALES OU LOCALES APPLICABLES, S'APPLIQUE UNIQUEMENT À VOUS, L'ACHETEUR ORIGINEL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI INCLUT LE PRODUIT ET DURE AUSSI LONGTEMPS QUE VOUS DEMEUREZ LE PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA GARANTIE S'ACHÈVE DÈS LORS QUE LE CLIENT DU SYSTÈME ORIGINEL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE LE SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE, CE QUI INCLUT LE PRODUIT. ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel ne garantit pas que le Produit sera exempt de défauts de conception ou d'erreurs appelées « errata ». Les errata caractérisés actuels sont disponibles sur demande. De plus, cette garantie limitée ne couvre PAS :  Tous les frais liés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris la main d'œuvre, l'installation ou les autres frais encourus par vous et, en particulier, les frais associés au retrait ou au remplacement de tout Produit soudé ou autrement fixé de façon permanente à toute carte de circuit imprimé, OU  Les dommages subis par le Produit pour toute cause externe, y compris les accidents, les problèmes d'alimentation électrique, les conditions environnementales, mécaniques ou électriques anormales, une utilisation non conforme aux instructions du Produit, une utilisation abusive, une négligence, une modification, une réparation, une installation incorrecte ou un essai inapproprié, OU  Tout Produit ayant été modifié ou utilisé en dehors des spécifications rendues publiques par Intel ou alors que les marques d'identification originales (marque de fabrique ou numéro de série) ont été enlevées, modifiées ou oblitérées du Produit ou dont l'étiquette ou la vis situées à l'extérieur du Produit ont été retirées ou cassées, OU  Tout Produit ayant atteint ses limites d'utilisation en écriture telles que mesurées par l'attribut SMART (E9) « Indicateur d'usure de support » (valeur de 1), comme expliqué ci-dessus. COMMENT OBTENIR LE SERVICE DE GARANTIE ? Pour obtenir le service de garantie du Produit (dans son emballage d'origine scellé), vous pouvez contacter le point d'achat d'origine conformément à ses instructions ou vous pouvez contacter Intel. Pour obtenir le service de garantie d'Intel, vous devez contacter le centre d'assistance à la clientèle d'Intel (« ICS ») de votre région pendant la période de garantie et pendant les heures ouvrées normales (heure locale), à l'exception des jours fériés, et retourner le Produit au centre ICS désigné. (Consultez ce qui suit pour savoir comment contacter le centre ICS de votre région.) Soyez préparé à fournir les éléments suivants : 1. Votre nom, adresses postale et électronique ainsi que votre numéro de téléphone Copyright © 2011, Intel Corporation. Tous droits réservés. 0511/Merci de recycler 2. Preuve d'achat 3. Nom du modèle et référence indiquée sur le Produit 4. (éventuellement) une description du système informatique ainsi que la marque et le modèle 5. Description du problème Il se peut que le représentant ICS ait besoin d'informations complémentaires, en fonction de la nature du problème. Une fois que le centre ICS a vérifié que le Produit peut bénéficier du service de garantie, un numéro d'autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« RMA ») vous est fourni, avec des instructions pour retourner le Produit au centre ICS désigné. Le numéro RMA doit être apposé sur l'emballage du Produit lors de son expédition au centre ICS. Intel n’acceptera aucun retour d’un Produit sur l’emballage duquel ne figure aucun numéro RMA valide. Vous devez retourner le Produit au centre ICS dans l'emballage original ou dans un emballage équivalent, avec des frais d'expédition prépayés (aux États-Unis) et assumer le risque de dommages ou de perte lors de l'expédition. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention peuvent être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous sollicitez des services de garantie n'a pas été acheté auprès d'un distributeur agréé dans votre pays/région. (Pour connaître la définition des termes pays/région, contactez votre centre d'assistance à la clientèle Intel® (ICS) local ou allez sur www.intel.com/p/fr_FR/support.) Intel peut décider de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit avec un Produit ou des composants neufs ou reconditionnés, à sa discrétion. Le Produit réparé ou remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d'Intel dans des délais raisonnables après réception par le centre ICS du Produit retourné. Le Produit retourné deviendra la propriété d'Intel à sa réception au centre ICS. Le Produit de remplacement est garanti selon les termes de cette garantie écrite et est sujet aux mêmes limitations et exclusions pendant une période de quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pour la fin de la période de garantie originale, la période la plus longue étant à retenir. Si Intel remplace le Produit, la période de garantie limitée du Produit de remplacement n'est pas prolongée. LIMITATIONS ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES DU PRODUIT ET INTEL NE RECONNAÎT AUCUNE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS S'Y LIMITER, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE, D'ADAPTATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, DE NON VIOLATION, DE RESPECT DES HABITUDES COMMERCIALES ÉTABLIES ET DES USAGES DU COMMERCE. Certains États (ou juridictions) n'autorisent pas l'exclusion des garanties implicites et il est possible que cette limitation ne vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU IMPLICITES EST LIMITÉE À LA PÉRIODE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. AUCUNE GARANTIE N'EST APPLICABLE APRÈS CETTE PÉRIODE. Certains États (ou juridictions) n'autorisent pas les limitations de durée sur les garanties implicites et il est possible que cette limitation ne vous soit pas applicable. LIMITATIONS DE RESPONSABILITÉ LA RESPONSABILITÉ D'INTEL DANS LE CADRE DE CETTE GARANTIE OU DE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, IMPLICITE OU EXPRESSE, EST LIMITÉE À LA RÉPARATION, AU REMPLACEMENT OU AU REMBOURSEMENT, COMME STIPULÉ CI-DESSUS. CES RECOURS SONT LES SEULS ET UNIQUES RECOURS EN CAS DE VIOLATION DE GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE AUTORISÉE PAR LA LOI, INTEL N'EST RESPONSABLE D'AUCUN DOMMAGE DIRECT, SPÉCIAL, ACCIDENTEL OU CONSÉCUTIF RÉSULTANT DE TOUTE VIOLATION DE LA GARANTIE OU SOUS TOUTE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE (Y COMPRIS, SANS S'Y LIMITER, PERTE DE PROFITS, IMMOBILISATION, PERTE D'ACHALANDAGE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT D'ÉQUIPEMENTS OU DE PROPRIÉTÉS ET TOUT COÛT DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION OU DE REPRODUCTION DE TOUT PROGRAMME, OU DONNÉE, STOCKÉ OU UTILISÉ AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ INFORMÉ DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains États (ou juridictions) n'autorisent pas l'exclusion ou la limitation des dommages accidentels ou consécutifs et il est possible que les limitations ou exclusions ci-dessus ne vous soient pas applicables. CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS DONNE DES DROITS SPÉCIFIQUES ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE VOUS AYEZ D'AUTRES DROITS, DIFFÉRENTS SELON L'ÉTAT OU LA JURIDICTION. TOUT LITIGE ÉMERGEANT OU LIÉ À CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE SERA ADJUDIQUÉ PAR LES TRIBUNAUX SUIVANTS ET RÉGI PAR LES LOIS SUIVANTES : AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, AU CANADA, EN AMÉRIQUE DU NORD ET EN AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LE TRIBUNAL SERA CELUI DE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIE, ÉTATS-UNIS ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L'ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. DANS LA RÉGION ASIE-PACIFIQUE (À L'EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE), LE TRIBUNAL SERA CELUI DE SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI Copyright © 2011, Intel Corporation. Tous droits réservés. 0511/Merci de recycler APPLICABLE CELLE DE SINGAPOUR. POUR L'EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA COMPÉTENCE TERRITORIALE EST CELLE DE LONDRES ET LE DROIT APPLICABLE EST CELUI DE L'ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES. EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L'EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION TRADUITE EN CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), C'EST LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE QUI PRÉVAUDRA. Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User's Guide How to Use This Manual This User’s Guide contains installation and configuration information for Microsoft Windows* 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT*, and general diagnostics and troubleshooting information. Additional Information For information on IBM OS/2*, 32-bit ODI* drivers, and Windows 3.x, supplementary information on Windows 95, and modem command reference information, see the text file README.TXT on the Intel CDROM. Visit the Intel support website at support.intel.com for software updates and supplementary technical information. See Appendix A for worldwide access to Intel Customer Support. Copyright © 1998 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, Oregon 97124-6497 Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this guide. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein. * Other product and corporate names may be trademarks of other companies and are used only for explanation and to the owners’ benefit, without intent to infringe. First edition June 1998 717438-001 Contents Hardware Installation........................................ 1-1 Windows 95 and 98 Installation........................ 2-1 Plug and Play Installation ......................................................... 2-1 Installing under Windows 95 and 98 ........................................ 2-1 Windows 95 and 98 Driver Parameters Reference .................. 2-2 Troubleshooting Modem Installation ........................................ 2-4 Windows NT Installation ................................... 3-1 Installing under NT 4.0 .............................................................. 3-1 Windows NT Driver Parameters ............................................... 3-3 Utilities, Diagnostics, and Troubleshooting ....... 4-1 Making a Floppy Disk ............................................................... 4-1 LAN Diagnostics ....................................................................... 4-2 Troubleshooting Checklist ........................................................ 4-2 Keyword Reference (All Drivers) .............................................. 4-3 Appendix A .......................................................A-1 A. Customer Support ................................................................ A-2 B. Specifications ....................................................................... A-3 C. Lifetime Limited Warranty .................................................... A-5 D. Regulatory Agency Notices .................................................. A-6 E. Software License Agreement ............................................... A-8 Note: Windows 3.x, IBM OS/2, 32-bit ODI Installation and troubleshooting information for the Windows 3.x, OS/2, and 32-bit ODI see the README.TXT file on the Intel CDROM. Modem command reference information can be found in the Windows Help file HELPDOCS.HLP on the Intel CD-ROM. iv Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide CHAPTER 1 Hardware Installation The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter supports both 10 Mbps and 100Mbps Ethernet networks and modem speeds up to 56Kbps for highperformance connectivity in any environment. It plugs into your computer’s Type II PC Card slot to connect to an Ethernet LAN and to the telephone network. Installation Overview Follow the instructions in this chapter to install the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter hardware and network and modem cabling. Then proceed to the software installation chapter for your operating system environment, as follows: Chapter 2. Windows 95 and 98 Installation Chapter 3. Windows NT Installation Chapter 4. Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Installation and troubleshooting information for the Windows 3.x, OS/2, and 32-bit ODI see the README.TXT file on the Intel CDROM. Modem command reference information can be found in the Windows Help file HELPDOCS.HLP on the Intel CD-ROM. The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter provides access to both 10Mbps and 100Mbps networks with a single adapter cable, and auto-negotiates 10Mbps or 100Mbps network speed. Category 5 (data grade) unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cabling is required for 100Mbps or Category 3 or 5 for 10Mbps. 1-2 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide Power-Saving Modes The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter includes battery saving technology for maximum battery life on the road. When the LAN cable is detached, the adapter senses the change and enters low-power mode. Normal power is restored when the cable is reattached. Before Installing Hardware Check Package Contents: • Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus adapter • Ethernet adapter cable with a 16-pin PC Card connector at one end and a female RJ-45 connector at the other • Modem cable with a 26-pin PC Card connector at one end and a female RJ-11 modular telephone connector at the other • RJ-11 modular telephone cable • Software, User's Guide and online documentation on CD-ROM • Quick Installation booklet Please fill out the Product Registration Card and mail or fax it immediately to the Intel office indicated on the card. Verify Other Required Equipment To install the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter, you need the following: 1 A mobile PC with a CardBus slot. 2 A local area network supporting 10 or 100Mbps Ethernet and a network operating system supported by the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter. Since the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter automatically detects the speed of the network to which it is connected, it may be safely connected to either a 100Base-TX or 10Base-T network, as specified in items 3 and 4 below. 3 For connection to a 100Base-TX 100Mbps Ethernet network, a Category 5 (data grade) unshielded twisted pair (UTP) network cable Hardware Installation 1-3 terminating in a male RJ-45 connector and connected to a 100Mbps hub or switch. 4 For connection to a 10Base-T twisted pair Ethernet network, a network cable terminating in a male RJ-45 connector and connected to a 10Mbps hub or switch. 5 For modem operations: an analog telephone line, RJ-11 modular telephone cable (supplied), and if needed, an RJ-11 adapter for the local telephone system. Communications software is also required for modem and fax operations. Do not connect to a digital telephone line or digital PABX system. In case of inadvertent connection to a digital line, special circuitry protects your modem. Determine System Requirements During installation of the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter hardware, d your operating system software should be loaded. If configured to do so, your system will detect the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter. For details on how to install driver software, see the chapter for your operating system environment. The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter hardware is compatible with Types II and III PC Card slots that support CardBus technology. Installation and removal procedures may vary on different computers. 1-4 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide Installing the Hardware Insert the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter 1 Grasp the CardBus adapter by the edges with the Intel label facing upward and the wide connector next to the CardBus slot. 2 Insert the card into a CardBus slot and push it in until firmly seated. The CardBus adapter can only be used in CardBus-compliant PC Card slots. Intel® PRO/100 Mobile Adapter 10/100 LAN + 56K Modem CardBus Inserting the CardBus into the Computer Hardware Installation 1-5 Connecting the LAN Adapter Cable to the Card • Attach the 16-pin connector at the end of the adapter cable to the matching receptacle on the left side of the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter. Press the connector gently into the receptacle on the card until it’s firmly in place. Do not force the connection. Intel® PRO/100 Mobile Adapter 10/100 LAN + 56K Modem CardBus Connecting the LAN Adapter Cable to the CardBus Adapter Disconnecting Adapter Cable from the Card • Grasp the small connector with the thumb and forefinger and gently pull it free of the card. Connecting the Network Cable to the LAN Adapter Cable • Plug the network cable into the female RJ-45 connector, as shown in the figure. Connecting to the Network Cable to LAN Adapter Cable LINK INTEGRITY LED ORANGE - 100Mbps GREEN - 10Mbps TRANSMISSION ACTIVITY LED 1-6 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide Connecting the Modem Cable to the Adapter • Attach the 26-pin connector at the end of the Intel modem cable to the matching receptacle on the right side of the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter. Press the connector gently into the receptacle on the card until it’s firmly in place. Do not force the connection. Intel® PRO/100 Mobile Adapter 10/100 LAN + 56K Modem CardBus Attaching the Modem Cable to the CardBus Adapter Disconnecting Modem Cable from the Adapter • Grasp the small connector with the thumb and forefinger and gently pull it free of the card. Connecting the Modem Cable to the Telephone Line • Plug one end of the RJ-11 modular telephone cable into the RJ-11 receptacle on the modem cable, and the other end into an analog (single-line) RJ-11 telephone wall jack. Connecting the Telephone Cable to the Modem Cable The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter will not work with digital telephone lines or digital PBX systems. Special circuitry protects your modem against damage from inadvertent connection to a digital line. Hardware Installation 1-7 MODEM CABLE TELEPHONE CABLE CARRIER DETECT TRANSMIT RECEIVE 1-8 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide CHAPTER 2 Windows 95 and 98 Installation Plug and Play Installation Plug and play installation of the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter is supported under Windows 95 OSR2 (version 950b or later) and Windows 98. Installation with these versions of Windows is described in this chapter. If you are using an earlier version of Windows 95 (versions 950 or 950a), see the README.TXT file on the Intel CD-ROM for installation information. Drivers Available The following drivers for Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98 are supplied with the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter: • NDIS3 driver (M32A.SYS) • NDIS4 driver (M32A4.SYS) The NDIS3 driver M32A.SYS is installed by default using the procedures in this chapter. For NDIS4 instructions, see the README.TXT file on the Intel CD-ROM. Software Installation for Windows 95 OSR2 Note: if your laptop computer does not have a CDROM drive, see "Making a Floppy Disk,"in Chapter 4. 1 With Windows running, insert the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter into the CardBus slot and connect cables as shown above. 2 Windows detects a PCI Ethernet controller and displays the Update Device Driver Wizard. In this procedure, the LAN driver will be installed first and then the modem driver. Insert the Intel CD-ROM 2-2 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide and click Next to start the procedure. (If the New Hardware Found window does NOT appear, proceed to step 8.) 3 Windows confirms the device name. Click Finish. This installs the LAN driver. Windows may prompt you for the location of Windows networking files. Usually these are located in C:\windows\options\cabs or on your Windows 95 installation disk. If prompted for the M32A.SYS file, change the path back to your Intel CD-ROM. If prompted to restart, click No. 4 Windows detects the modem portion of the adapter and repeats the process above for the modem component. If prompted for other files, try changing the path to the Intel CD-ROM. Note: Windows may display a message indicating some VXD files are out of date. To determine if this affects operation of your computer, restart and check the modem. If it will not function, see the README.TXT file for detailed information. 5 For most networks, you will need to configure properties for your protocols, computer identification, and preferred servers. Contact your network administrator for details if you need assistance. 6 Restart the computer for the configuration to take effect. 7 When the computer restarts, the Country Identifier utility runs. Specify your location and Save or Exit. 8 If the New Hardware Found window does NOT appear, you may need to enable CardBus support in your computer BIOS. See your computer's manual for information or check their website. Software Installation for Windows 98 Note: if your laptop computer does not have a CDROM drive, see "Making a Floppy Disk" in Chapter 4. 1 With Windows running, insert the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter into the CardBus slot and connect cables as shown above. 2 Windows detects a PCI Ethernet Controller and displays the Add New Hardware Wizard. Click Next to continue. In this procedure, the LAN driver will be installed first and then the modem driver. (If the New Hardware Found window does NOT appear, proceed to step 13.) 3 On the next screen, Windows prompts for a driver search. Choose "Search for the best driver (Recommended)" and click Next. Windows 95 and 98 Installation 2-3 4 Insert the Intel CD-ROM or floppy disk and click Next to continue. If necessary, specify the path to your CD-ROM or floppy drive and click Next. 5 Windows confirms the device name and location of the LAN driver (NETM32A.INF). Click Next to continue. Windows may prompt you for the location of Windows networking files. Usually these are located in C:\windows\options\cabs or on your Windows 98 installation disk. 6 A message confirming successful LAN driver installation appears. Click Finish. 7 Do not restart your computer yet. When prompted to do so, click No. 8 Windows detects the modem portion of the adapter and repeats the process above for the modem (driver name is MDMM32A.INF). At the end of this process, a small dialog appears reminding you to restart. Click OK to close. 9 The Country Identifier utility also runs at this time. Specify your location and click Exit or Save. 10 If the New Hardware Found wizard is present, click Finish. 11 For most networks, you will need to configure properties for your protocols, computer identification, and preferred servers. Contact your network administrator for details if you need assistance. 12 Restart the computer to complete installation. 13 If the New Hardware Found window does NOT appear, you may need to enable CardBus support in your mobile computer's BIOS. See your computer's manual for information or check their web site. 2-4 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide Windows 95 and 98 Driver Parameters Reference M32A.SYS (NDIS3) and M32AN4.SYS (NDIS4) Driver Settings M32A.SYS is an NDIS3 driver. M32A4.SYS is an NDIS4 driver. Both conform to the Microsoft Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS). Required files for using M32A.SYS with Windows 95 and 98 include: NETM32A.INF Installation file for Windows 95 and 98 M32A.SYS NDIS3 driver for Windows 95 and 98 There are user-configurable parameters to the M32A.SYS and M32A4.SYS drivers which can be modified using the Network Control Panel built into Windows 95 and 98. This applet queries the user for parameter selections and sets the corresponding parameters in the registry. User-configurable parameters are as follows (for descriptions see Chapter 4): Parameter Valid Values Reg. Value Adapter LEDs OFF 0 ON 1 Address Mode IO IO MEMORY MEMORY Cable Detect OFF 0 ON 1 Early Receive OFF 0 ON 1 Early Transmit OFF 0 ON 1 Line Mode AutoDetect 0 Half-Duplex 1 Full-Duplex 2 Line Speed AutoDetect 0 10 Mbps 1 100 Mbps 2 Link Integrity OFF 0 ON 1 Windows 95 and 98 Installation 2-5 Network Address See Network Administrators note below. Receive Buffer Size 0-100 same Transmit Buffer Size 0-100 same For Network Administrators Only. The network node address can be modified by specifying a value for Network Address such as 00A0C9112233. If the user does NOT specify a Network Address, then the M32A.SYS driver uses the network node address contained in the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter Card Information Structure. Troubleshooting Modem Installation Review this section if any of the following problems occur: • Modem initialization errors occur when attempting to dial-out using a communications application. • Connection fails or other problems occur. It may be necessary to define a modem type within your communications application. If the Intel modem is not listed, choose a Generic Hayes compatible device. If your computer is equipped with an infrared communications port, you may need to disable this port. These ports often use COM port resources required for other communications devices. Disable the infrared port both in the computer’s CMOS or BIOS setup program and the Windows 95 Device Manager, as follows: 1 Some computers use a hardware setup utility to configure the infrared port in the BIOS. See your computer documentation. 2 To disable the infrared communications port in Windows 95, go to Device Manager tab under System in the Control Panel. 3 Double-click the Ports (COM & LPT) entry and the IR Serial Port entry. Check the Disable in this Hardware Profile option to disable the device. 2-6 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide 4 You may also need to comment out any "device=" lines containing TRANXIT in the SYSTEM.INI file. Use a semicolin at the beginning of the line to comment out the line. Use the Modem Diagnostics Tool to verify the computer-to-modem interface. 1 In the Modems option in Control Panel, click Diagnostics. 2 In Diagnostics properties, highlight the COM port associated with the Intel modem and click the More Info button. This causes Windows 95 and 98 to send commands to and read responses from the modem and display information about the modem and its COM port. The Port Information box should display the following information: • The IRQ and I/O address of the modem’s COM port. These should match the physical configuration of the port or modem adapter. • Modem responses to various AT commands. The Intel modem may return ERROR for some AT commands that are not supported. This does not indicate a failure. 3 The Record a Log File option in the Modems option can also help identify modem problems by recording modem commands and responses in a MODEMLOG.TXT file. To create the MODEMLOG.TXT file, go to Control Panel, Modems, Properties, Connection, Advanced. In the Advanced Connection Settings window, place a check mark in the Record a log file option box. A MODEMLOG.TXT file will be created in the C:\WINDOWS directory the next time the modem is used. CHAPTER 3 Windows NT Installation The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter supports manual installation under Microsoft Windows NT 4.0. Plug and Play installation and hot swapping of CardBus adapters are not directly supported by Windows NT. When the CardBus Adapter is installed, the other PC Card slot is available for use by another PC Card. Drivers Available The following drivers for Windows NT can be found on the Intel CDROM: • OEMSETNT - Installation file • M32A.SYS - NDIS3 driver • M32A4.SYS - NDIS4 driver • M32MENT4.SYS - modem enabler For the latest information on CardBus support in Windows NT, review the README.TXT file on the Intel CD-ROM or visit the Intel support web site at support.intel.com. Software Installation for Windows NT 1 Before powering-up your mobile computer, insert the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter into the CardBus slot, as shown on page 1. 2 With the adapter in the CardBus slot, power-up the computer, click Start, click Settings, and select the Control Panel. The Control Panel opens. 3 Double-click the Network icon. The Network Settings window opens. 4 Click the Adapters tab. The Network Adapters window opens. 5 Click Add. The Select Network Adapter window opens. 3-2 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide 6 Click Have Disk, insert the Intel CD-ROM, and specify the correct path for the CD. 7 Click OK. The Select OEM Option window opens, showing the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter. 8 Click OK. The Windows NT Setup window briefly displays. 9 The Intel PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 Settings window opens, displaying the default settings. Note: In most circumstances, the default settings will properly operate the adapter. However, some computers may require changes to the defaults. 10 Click OK. The Network Settings window redisplays. 11 Click Close. Complete any relevant dialog boxes that appear such as TCP/IP settings. Contact your Network Administrator for help if necessary. 12 When the Network Settings Change window opens, click Yes to restart the computer. Modem Setup 13 After the computer has been restarted, select Modems from the Control Panel. 14 At the Install New Modem screen make sure that the Don’t detect my modem; I will select it from a list checkbox is NOT checked. Click Next. NT will query the COM ports looking for the Intel modem. Once the Intel modem is found, click Next. If a Standard Modem is found, click Change. On the next screen, click Have disk. Type in the path to your CD-ROM drive and click OK. 15 The Country Identifier utility automatically starts. Make the appropriate country selection (United States or Canada is the default). 16 At the Install New Modem screen click Finish. 17 At the Modems Properties screen click Dialing Properties to set up dialing properties (not necessary if a modem had been previously installed). Click Close. Windows NT Installation 3-3 Windows NT Driver Parameters M32A.SYS and M32A4.SYS driver parameters can be modified using the Windows NT Network Control Panel. This applet uses the OEMSETNT.INF file to set the corresponding parameters in the registry. For definitions of the keywords listed, see Keyword Reference in Chapter 4. Diagnostics and Troubleshooting. Parameter Valid Values Registry Value Cable Detect OFF 0 ON 1 Early Receive OFF 0 ON 1 Early Transmit OFF 0 ON 1 Interrupt 3 - 15 same Interrupt Style AutoDetect 0 PCI IRQ 1 ISA IRQ 2 I/O Port 0x1000-0xF800 same LEDs Enabled OFF 0 ON 1 Line Mode AutoDetect 0 Half-Duplex 1 Full-Duplex 2 Line Speed AutoDetect 0 10 Mbps 1 100 Mbps 2 LinkIntegrity OFF 0 ON 1 Memory Address 0xC0000-B000C000 same Memory Mode OFF 0 ON 1 3-4 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide PCCard Socket AutoDetect 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Rx Buffer Size 0-100 same Tx Buffer Size 0-100 same For Network Administrators Only. To modify the network node address manually, select Run, type regedit and press Return. Select HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE, System, CurrentControlSet, Services, M32A. Click the Edit menu, select New, String Value. Rename the new value NetworkAddress (no spaces, case sensitive), press Enter. Doubleclick NetworkAddress and enter the 12 digit address (no spaces) in the data field and click OK. CHAPTER 4 Utilities, Diagnostics, and Troubleshooting This chapter contains supplementary diagnostics and troubleshooting information for the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter. For information specific to your operating environment, see the appropriate installation chapter. This supplementary information is intended for users or network administrators who are already familiar with the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter and its user documentation, and who have run into difficulties after having completed the appropriate installation and troubleshooting procedures for their operating environment. For additional troubleshooting information, see the Windows Help file HELPDOCS.HLP on the Intel CD-ROM. Additional Sources of Information Consult your computer and network documentation as needed. For the latest technical notes on the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter, see the README.TXT file on the Intel CD-ROM, or visit the Intel World Wide Web support site at support.intel.com. See Appendix A in this User’s Guide for Intel support services access information. Making a Floppy Disk If your laptop computer does not have a CD-ROM drive, you may create a floppy install disk from the CD-ROM on another computer. Follow these steps: 1 Insert the Intel CD-ROM disk into the CD-ROM drive. 2 Insert a blank, formatted floppy disk into the floppy drive. 3 Click Start and then click Run. 4-2 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide 4 In the window that appears, type: d:\makedisk d: a: (where d: is your CD drive and a: is your floppy.) 5 Click OK to create the floppy disk. An MS-DOS window opens and the program executes, making the floppy. LAN Diagnostics If you have trouble installing or setting up the LAN portion of the PRO/ 100 adapter, try running the LAN diagnostics utility. To run this utility, insert the Intel CD-ROM, click Start, then Run, and type: M32ADIAG.EXE and click OK. This starts the diagnostics utility. The utility can perform several self-tests and provide useful data about the network connection. For troubleshooting information, click the Support tab and then click the Troubleshoot button. Executing the Windows 95, 98, and NT Diagnostic Program 1 Verify that the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter has been installed and configured to work in your version of Windows. 2 Insert the Intel CD-ROM in your CD-ROM drive. 3 Select Start, Run, X:\M32ADIAG.EXW, where X is the drive letter for your CD-ROM. If you don't have a CD-ROM drive, see the section above on Making a Floppy Disk. 4 Navigate through the diagnostic program by clicking the appropriate tab. When finished, click OK to exit. Troubleshooting Checklist • Review the README.TXT file on the Intel CD-ROM. • Be sure you have the current drivers for your adapter. Check the Intel support web site at support.intel.com. • When loading drivers or running the test utility, keep the LAN adapter cable attached to the CardBus adapter. Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 4-3 • If trying to connect to a Novell server, try chaniging the frame type of the IPX/SPX protocol from "Auto" to the specific frame type used by the server. • In a twisted pair environment, try plugging directly into the hub or concentrator. • Plug in to a known working network connection. • Try using the adapter on a different computer. • Try another adapter if available. • If your computer has multiple PC Card sockets, move the adapter to another socket. • If you have more than one PC Card device in your computer, remove the non-Intel PC Card devices. • Make sure that the interrupt, memory address, and I/O address for the Intel device do not conflict with other installed hardware (such as sound cards, CD-ROM drives and PEN devices). However, conflicts with the CardBus controllers and/or IRQ handler for PCI steering are normal and do not impact operation of the adapter • Try using different interrupt locations (i.e., 5, 10, 11). • Try using different port addresses (i.e., 280, 290, 310, 320). Keyword Reference (All Drivers) ADAPTER LEDS see NOLED. ADDRESS MODE when set to IO disables requests for memory-mapped mode on systems that only support an I/O-driven card. The MEMORY setting provides increased performance on computers that allow simultaneous availability of memory and I/O resources. CABLE DETECT turns the automatic cable detect feature on or off. When on, cable detect senses when there is no LAN cable attached to the card, and puts the adapter into a low-power mode. Normal power is restored when the cable is reattached. DIRECT ENABLE (32-bit NDIS Drivers) forces the method used by the driver to determine if an Intel CardBus adapter is present. Valid parameters are AutoDetect, Off, and On. AutoDetect allows the driver to 4-4 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide determine if the CardBus bridge has already been set up by another enabler such as Socket and Card Services. If so, driver will use the current configuration. On forces the driver to enable the CardBus bridge without checking its current state. EARLY RECEIVE see NOEARLYRX. EARLY TRANSMIT see NOEARLYTX. INT, INTERRUPT see IRQ. INTERRUPT STYLE (For 32-bit NDIS Drivers only) forces the driver to use ISA IRQ routing or PCI IRQ routing. Some CardBus bridges have the capability of supporting both PCI and ISA style IRQ routing. Valid parameters are AutoDetect, PCI-IRQ, and ISA-IRQ. IOADDRESS, IOBASEADDRESS specifies the base I/O address of the Intel adapter I/O ports, in hexadecimal notation. The Intel CardBus adapter requires 128 contiguous I/O addresses if run in I/O mode. If using memory-mapped I/O mode, no I/O ports are necessary. If not used, driver will detect an I/O port automatically. I/O PORT see IOADDRESS IRQ specifies a hardware interrupt for the adapter. If PCI interrupts are used on the CardBus bridge, this parameter is ignored (unless the ISAIRQ keyword is used as an override). If this parameter is not specified the driver will detect an IRQ automatically. ISAIRQ use this keyword to force ISA IRQ routing. Some CardBus bridges have the capability of supporting both PCI and ISA style IRQ routing. The driver automatically determines the best choice for this option unless this keyword is used as an override. LEDS ENABLED see NOLED. LINE MODE (For 32-bit NDIS Drivers) selects either half-duplex or full-duplex mode for the network. Valid parameters are AutoDetect, Half Duplex, and Full-Duplex. Selecting full-duplex enables the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter to send and receive data simultaneously when connected to a full-duplex hub. LINE SPEED (For 32-bit NDIS Drivers) forces operation to 10 or 100 Mbps. Valid parameters are AutoDetect, 10 Mbps, and 100 Mbps. Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 4-5 LINK INTEGRITY, LINK DISABLE disables link integrity for nonIEEE 10BASE-T networks such as StarLAN 10. Without this keyword in the driver command line, the driver defaults to link integrity ENABLED. MEM, MEMORY, MEMORY ADDRESS specifies the host PC memory location for the Intel adapter in hexadecimal notation, when MODE MEMORY (memory-mapped I/O) is being used (see MODE). The memory block occupies 4 Kbytes of host memory. MODE, MEMORY MODE when set to IO (Memory Mode OFF) disables request for memory-mapped mode on systems that only support an I/O driven card. The MEMORY setting provides increased performance on computers that allow simultaneous availability of memory and I/O resources. NETWORK ADDRESS allows user to override adapter’s unique network node address by specifying a different node address. NODEADDRESS see NETWORKADDRESS. NOEARLYRX disables Advanced Look-ahead Pipelining features of the adapter. This keyword may be used to troubleshoot systems that have inexplicable network problems. Using this keyword may negatively impact performance. NOEARLYTX disables early transmit capability of the Adapter. This keyword may be used to troubleshoot systems with inexplicable network problems. Keyword could negatively impact performance. NOLED turns off LED indicators to conserve power. PCCARD SOCKET (32-bit NDIS drivers) see SOCKET. PCIIRQ forces the driver to use PCI IRQ routing. Some CardBus bridges have the capability of supporting both PCI and ISA style IRQ routing. The driver automatically determines the best choice for this option unless this keyword is used as an override. RECEIVE BUFFER SIZE (RXBUFFERSIZE) sets size of the adapter receive packet buffer. This is a number in decimal in the range 1 - 30 for 16-bit drivers and 1 - 100 for the 32-bit ODI driver. Each packet adds approximately 1520 bytes to the resident size of the driver. 4-6 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide SOCKET (For 32-bit NDIS3 Driver M32A.SYS) identifies the number of the host computer’s PC slot or socket into which the Intel CardBus adapter is inserted. Valid parameters are AutoDetect, 1, 2, 3, and 4. If a socket number is specified, only the specified socket is checked for the Intel adapter. Under AutoDetect, the driver will automatically check all slots for the Intel CardBus adapter. TRANSMIT BUFFERS SIZE (TXBUFFERSIZE) sets the size of the adapter transmit packet buffer. This is the number of transmit packets in decimal in the range 1 - 10 for 16-bit drivers and 1 - 100 for the 32-bit ODI driver. Each packet adds approximately 1520 bytes to the resident size of the driver. Appendix A - Intel Automated Customer Support - Specifications - Limited Lifetime Hardware Warranty - Regulatory Notices - Software License Agreement A-2 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide Intel Automated Customer Support You can reach Intel’s automated support services 24 hours a day, every day at no charge. The services contain the most up-to-date information about Intel products. You can access installation instructions, troubleshooting information, and general product information. Readme files on Your Product Disk Review the topics in the README.TXT file on the CD-ROM. Web and Internet Sites Support: http://support.intel.com Network Products: http://www.intel.com/network Corporate: http://www.intel.com FTP Host: download.intel.com FTP Directory: /support/etherexpress/ Customer Support Technicians US and Canada: 1-916-377-7000 (7:00 - 17:00 M-F Pacific Time) Worldwide access: Intel has technical support centers worldwide. Many of the centers are staffed by technicians who speak the local languages. For a list of all Intel support centers, the telephone numbers, and the times they are open, download document 9089 from one of the automated services. Appendix A-3 Specifications General Specifications Model MBLA3256 Cable: 100Base-TX unshielded twisted pair for use on Category 5 (data grade) cabling; 10Base-T unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Connector: RJ-45 Operating Distance: 328 ft (100 m) Ethernet specifications Ethernet IEEE 802.3 for 10 Mbps, 802.3u for 100 Mbps Type II CardBus PC Card 10/100 Mbps full-duplex Size: 3.37 in (86 mm) x 2.13 in (54.0 mm) x 0.20 in (5.0 mm) excluding adapter cable and network connection Weight: 0.85 oz (24 g) Power Requirements: 10Base-T 3.3V DC, 110 mA typical 100Base-TX 3.3V DC, 160 mA typical Modem 3.3V DC, 240 mA typical (connected) 3.3V DC, 40 mA typical (sleep mode) 100Base-T+Modem 3.3V DC, 280 mA typical 100Base-TX+Modem 3.3V DC, 340 mA typical Power Management: Supports ACPI and CardBus Power Management Specification Temperature Range: Operating: 32°F to 131°F (0°C to 55°C) Storage: -4°F to 149°F (-20°C to 65°C) Humidity: 95% max. noncondensing LEDs: Link integrity, transmission activity Certification: FCC Part 15, Class B, CE Mark (EN 55022, Class B, EN50082) A-4 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide Modem Specifications Data modulation: K56flex*/V.90 up to 56000 bps; V.34 from 33,600 down to 2400 bps; V.32terbo at 19200 and 16800 bps; V.32bis at 14400, 12000, 9600, and 7200 bps, uncoded at 4800 bps; V.32 at 9600 bps, uncoded at 4800 bps; V.23 at 1200/75 and 75/1200 bps; V.22bis at 2400 bps; V.22 at 1200 bps; Bell 212A at 1200 bps Fax modulation: V.17 at 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, and 4800 bps; V.29 at 9600, 7200, and 4800 bps; V.27ter at 4800 and 2400 bps Fax support: Group 3, EIA/TIA Class 1 Error control: V.42 Error Control, MNP Levels 2-4 Error Detection Data compression: V.42bis (4:1) or MNP Level 5 (2:1) Diagnostics: Power-up self tests of program RAM, data RAM, and nonvolatile memory. Nonvolatile RAM: 1 user definable profile; 2 thirty-six digit telephone numbers; LAN Adapter ID and serial number Command set: Hayes and Microcom compatible AT commands Data interface: PCMCIA Release 2.1 compliant, 68-pin CardBus connector Analog interface: RJ-11C modular telephone connector DTE speeds: 1200, 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 14400, 19200, 37400, 57600, and 115200 bps Appendix A-5 Limited Lifetime Hardware Warranty Intel warrants to the original owner that the adapter product delivered in this package will be free from defects in material and workmanship. This warranty does not cover the adapter product if it is damaged in the process of being installed or improperly used. THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY OF NONINFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARISING OUT OF ANY PROPOSAL, SPECIFICATION, OR SAMPLE. This warranty does not cover replacement of adapter products damaged by abuse, accident, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, disaster, improper installation, or improper testing. If the adapter product is found to be defective, Intel, at its option, will replace or repair the hardware product at no charge except as set forth below, or refund your purchase price provided that you deliver the adapter product along with a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number (see below), along with proof of purchase (if not registered), either to the dealer from whom you purchased it or to Intel with an explanation of any deficiency. If you ship the adapter product, you must assume the risk of damage or loss in transit. You must use the original container (or the equivalent) and pay the shipping charge. Intel may replace or repair the adapter product with either new or reconditioned parts, and any adapter product, or part thereof replaced by Intel becomes Intel’s property. Repaired or replaced adapter products will be returned to you at the same revision level as received or higher, at Intel’s option. Intel reserves the right to replace discontinued adapter products with an equivalent current generation adapter product. Returning a defective product From North America: Before returning any adapter product, contact Intel Customer Support and obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number by calling +1 916-377-7000. If the Customer Support Group verifies that the adapter product is defective, they will have the RMA department issue you an RMA number to place on the outer package of the adapter product. Intel cannot accept any product without an RMA number on the package. All other locations: Return the adapter product to the place of purchase for a refund or replacement. Intel Adapter Money-back Guarantee (North America Only) Intel wants you to be completely satisfied with the Intel adapter product that you have purchased. Any time within ninety (90) days of purchase, you may return your Intel adapter to the original place of purchase for a full refund of the purchase price from your dealer. Resellers and distributors, respectively, accepting returns and refunding money back to their customers may return Intel adapters to their original place of purchase. Intel guarantees that it will accept returns under this policy and refund the original purchase price to customers purchasing directly from Intel. Limitation of Liability and Remedies INTEL’S SOLE LIABILITY HEREUNDER SHALL BE LIMITED TO DIRECT, OBJECTIVELY MEASURABLE DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT OR SPECULATIVE DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND SPECIAL DAMAGES) INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY, REPROCUREMENT COSTS, LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS, LOSS OF GOODWILL, AND LOSS OF PROFITS, WHETHER ANY SUCH DAMAGES ARISE OUT OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE, TORT, OR UNDER ANY WARRANTY, IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER INTEL HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, INTEL’S TOTAL LIABILITY FOR ALL CLAIMS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THESE LIMITATIONS ON POTENTIAL LIABILITIES WERE AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT IN SETTING THE PRODUCT PRICE. INTEL NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANYONE TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITIES. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you. A-6 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide Critical Control Applications: Intel specifically disclaims liability for use of the adapter product in critical control applications (including, for example only, safety or health care control systems, nuclear energy control systems, or air or ground traffic control systems) by Licensee or Sublicensees, and such use is entirely at the user’s risk. Licensee agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold Intel harmless from and against any and all claims arising out of use of the adapter product in such applications by Licensee or Sublicensees. Software: Software provided with the adapter product is not covered under the hardware warranty described above. See the applicable software license agreement which shipped with the adapter product for details on any software warranty. FCC Compliance Statement FCC Rules and Regulations - Part 15 This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. Installed correctly, it probably will not interfere with radio or TV reception. However, we do not guarantee the absence of interference. This product generates and uses energy of about the same frequency as radio and TV broadcasts. Installed incorrectly, it may interfere with reception of radio and TV broadcasts. If you suspect this product is causing interference, turn your computer on and off while the radio or TV is showing interference. If the interference disappears when you turn the computer off and reappears when you turn the computer on, something in the computer is causing interference. To reduce interference, try these suggestions: • Change the direction of the radio or TV antenna. • Move the computer, radio or TV. For example, if the computer is to the right of the TV, move it to the left of the TV. Or move them farther apart. • Plug the computer into a different electrical outlet than the radio or TV. • Ensure that all expansion slots (on the back or side of the computer) are covered. Also ensure that all metal retaining brackets are tightly attached to the computer. NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION If the device is changed or modified without permission from Intel, the user may void his or her authority to operate the equipment. FCC Rules and Regulations - Part 68 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the back of the Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus adapter is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC Registration Number and Ringer Equivalency Number (REN) for this equipment. You must, upon request, provide this information to your telephone company. Appendix A-7 The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most but not all areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area. If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. But if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment. If they do, you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment, please contact Intel Customer Support, at 916-377-7000 for information on obtaining service or repairs. The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning. There are no user serviceable parts contained in this equipment. This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs. Canadian compliance (Industry Canada) When tested in at least one intended host: This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES- 003 of the Canadian Department of Communications. Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Class B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par le Ministre Canadien des Communications. NOTICE: The Industry Canada (IC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by a user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telephone communications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. A-8 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5. REN: See back of unit. Manufacturer declaration This certifies that Intel PRO/100 Mobile Adapters comply with the EU Directive 89/336/EEC, using the EMC standards EN55022 (Class B) and EN50082-1. This product also meets or exceeds EN60950 safety requirements. This product has been tested and verified to meet CISPR 22 Class B requirements. Intel Corporation Network Products Division - MS JF3-446 2111 N.E. 25th Ave. Hillsboro, Oregon 97124 Software License Agreement BY USING THIS SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE UNTIL YOU HAVE CAREFULLY READ AND AGREED TO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE AND ANY ACCOMPANYING ITEMS. LICENSE: Intel Corporation (“Intel”) grants you the non-exclusive right to use the enclosed software program (the “Software”). You will not use, copy, modify, rent, sell or transfer the Software or any portion thereof except as provided in this Agreement. You may: 1. Install/use the Software on a single computer or on a single local area network (“LAN”) server; 2. Copy the Software solely for backup or archival purposes, including copying the Software into memory. RESTRICTIONS: You Will Not: 1. Sublicense the Software; 2. Reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software; 3. Copy the Software, in whole or in part, except as provided in this Agreement. TRANSFER: You may transfer the Software to another party if the receiving party agrees to the terms of this Agreement and you retain no copies of the Software and accompanying documentation. Transfer of the Software terminates your right to use the Software. OWNERSHIP AND COPYRIGHT OF SOFTWARE: Title to the Software and all copies thereof remain with Intel or its vendors. The Software is copyrighted and is protected by United States and international copyright laws. You will not remove the copyright notice from the Software. You agree to prevent any unauthorized copying of the Software. DUAL MEDIA SOFTWARE: If the Software package contains multiple media, you may only use the disks appropriate for your single-user computer or LAN. Appendix A-9 WARRANTY: The Software is provided “AS IS.” Intel warrants that the media on which the Software is furnished will be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of purchase. Upon return of such defective media, Intel’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be the replacement of the Software. THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: NEITHER INTEL NOR ITS VENDORS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF DATA, INTERRUPTIONS OF BUSINESS, NOR FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. AUDIT: Intel reserves the right to have audits conducted to verify your compliance with this Agreement. TERMINATION OF THIS LICENSE: Intel may terminate this license at any time if you are in breach of any of its terms and conditions. Upon termination, you will immediately destroy the Software or return all copies of the Software and documentation to Intel. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS: The Software and documentation were developed at private expense and are provided with “RESTRICTED RIGHTS.” Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 52.227-14 and DFAR 252.227-7013 et seq. or its successor. EXPORT LAWS: You agree that the distribution and export/re-export of the Software is in compliance with the laws, regulations, orders or other restrictions of the U.S. Export Administration Regulations. APPLICABLE LAW: This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of California and the United States, including patent and copyright laws. Any claim arising out of this Agreement will be brought in Santa Clara County, California.PLEASE REVIEW THE LICENSE AGREEMENT BELOW. BY OPENING THIS SOFTWARE OR PACKAGE OR OTHERWISE DOWNLOADING OR COPYING THIS SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE UNTIL YOU HAVE CAREFULLY READ AND AGREED TO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL OR USE THIS SOFTWARE. Year 2000 Statement An Intel product, when used in accordance with its associated documentation, is “Year 2000 Capable” when, upon installation, it accurately stores, displays, processes, provides, and/or receives date data from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, including leap year calculations, provided that all other technology used in combination with said product properly exchanges date data with it. See http://www.intel.com/support/year2000 for more information. A-10 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide Guide de configuration Intel NetportExpress Serveur d’impression TM Copyright © 1997 Intel Corporation. Tous droits réservés. Première édition, août 1997 679940-001 Intel Corporation 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway Hillsboro, Oregon 97124-6497 Intel Corporation n’assume aucune responsabilité quant aux erreurs ou omissions que pourraient contenir ce guide ni ne s’engage à mettre à jour son contenu. *Les autres noms de produit et appellations commerciales sont des marques commerciales de sociétés tierces et sont utilisés exclusivement à titre explicatif, au bénéfice de leur détenteur et sans intention d’enfreindre la loi. A propose de NetportExpressTM PRO et PRO/100 serveurs d’impression Les serveurs d’impression Intel NetportExpressTM PRO et PRO/100 assurent une performance élevée ainsi qu’une gestion centralisée des imprimantes installées sur des réseaux à protocoles multiples. Les serveurs d’impression NetportExpress vous permettent de repérer les imprimantes où qu’elles se trouvent sur un réseau local (LAN). Les serveurs d’impression NetportExpress prennent en charge la plupart des marques et modèles d’imprimantes sur réseaux utilisant les protocoles IPX/SPX*, NetBEUI, TCP/IP et AppleTalk* Phase II. PARALLEL 1 PARALLEL 2 SERIAL POWER BNC RJ-45 TEST NetportExpress PRO Activity Transmit Receive PC-3782 Serveur d'impression NetportExpress Parallèle Parallèle Sèrie Macintosh* Windows* UNIX* NetWare* OS/2* Table des matières Installation du matériel ........................................... 2 Serveurs d’impression PRO/100 PRO externes et internes Installation du logiciel ............................................ 6 Installation du CD-ROM et configuration Configuration de NDS de Novell NetWare* .................... 8 Mode serveur d’impression, mode imprimante distante Configuration de Bindery de Novell NetWare ................. 10 Mode serveur d’impression, mode imprimante distante Impression réseau dans l’environnement Microsoft .......... 12 Adresse IP sous Windows* 95, Windows NT* et Windows pour Workgroups Configuration de LAN Manager*/LAN Server.................. 16 Impression à l’aide de netuse Configuration d’AppleTalk* ...................................... 18 Connectivité des imprimantes Configuration d’UNIX* ............................................ 19 Adresse IP, proprint, impression avec lpr/lpd, mises à jour du microprogramme à l’aide de tftp Configuration d’AIX* .............................................. 27 Impression avec lpr/lpd Gestion du serveur NetportExpressTM ........................... 30 Modification des configurations, mises à jour du microprogramme, paramètres avancés Dépannage ......................................................... 33 Solutions matériel, logiciel, impression Limites de la garantie/Notices ................................... 40 Informations sur les produits Support clientèle .................................................. 42 Numéros des services d’assistance, accès au Web Index ............................................................... 44 2 PARALLEL 1 PARALLEL 2 SERIAL PARALLEL PORT POWER RJ45 Activity Transmit Receive DIAG NetportExpress PRO/100 TM SW1 10/100 PC-3773 Poursuivez l’installation du logiciel (voir la page 6). . . 3 Branchez les câbles d’alimentation aux imprimantes ainsi qu’aux ports du serveur d’impression. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton « diag » pour envoyer une page d’essai du serveur d’impression NetportExpress à l’imprimante. La page d’essai comprend l’ID de périphérique et diverses autres données de configuration. 2 Branchez le câble d’alimentation dans le serveur d’impression. 1 Branchez le câble réseau au connecteur RJ-45. Utilisez un câble Catégorie 5 pour la connexion à un réseau 100 Mbits/s. Utilisez un câble Catégorie 3 ou 5 pour la connexion à un Voyant réseau 10 Mbits/s. d’activité ID de périphérique et adresse réseau (voir au bas) Serveurs d’impression NetportExpress PRO/100 à port unique et à 3 ports (Ethernet seulement) Installation du matériel Conseils d’installation du serveur d’impression PRO/100 • Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress est prêt lorsque son voyant d’activité est vert et ne clignote pas. Les deux autres voyants peuvent clignoter, indiquant ainsi une communication avec le réseau. Si le voyant d’activité est rouge et clignote, consultez la section Dépannage de ce manuel. • Le serveur d’impression PRO/100 détecte automatiquement la vitesse du réseau Ethernet : 10 ou 100 Mbits/s. • Le serveur d’impression détecte également le type de trames Novell NetWare : 802.2, 802.3, Ethernet II ou SNAP. AVERTISSEMENT Lorsque vous branchez le câble d’alimentation, utilisez le bloc d’alimentation fourni avec le PRO/100. Toute autre source d’alimentation pourrait entraîner un mauvais fonctionnement du serveur PRO/100. 3 PARALLEL 1 PARALLEL 2 SERIAL POWER BNC RJ-45 Activity Transmit Receive DIAG NetportExpress PRO TM DB-9 POWER RJ-45 DIAG 1 2 PC-3774 Conseils d’installation du serveur d’impression PRO externe • Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress est prêt lorsque son voyant d’activité est vert et ne clignote pas. Les deux autres voyants peuvent clignoter, indiquant ainsi une communication avec le réseau. Si le voyant d’activité est rouge et clignote, consultez la section Dépannage de ce manuel. • Le serveur PRO détecte le type de trames Novell NetWare : 802.2, 802.3, Ethernet II ou SNAP. • La version pour réseau en anneau à jeton détecte automatiquement le débit de données lorsque les deux interrupteurs sont en position UP (réglage par défaut). (Voir la page 34 pour la liste des réglages.) AVERTISSEMENT Lorsque vous branchez le câble d’alimentation, utilisez le bloc d’alimentation fourni avec le serveur PRO. Toute autre source d’alimentation pourrait entraîner un mauvais fonctionnement du serveur PRO. Poursuivez l’installation du logiciel (voir la page 6). . . 3 Branchez les câbles d’alimentation aux imprimantes ainsi qu’aux ports du serveur d’impression. Connecteurs Ethernet Interrupteurs 2 Branchez le câble d’alimentation dans le serveur d’impression. 1 Branchez le câble réseau (Catégorie 3 ou 5). Le PRO Ethernet utilise un connecteur BNC ou RJ-45. Le PRO pour réseau en anneau à jeton utilise un connecteur RJ-45 ou DB-9. Voyant d’activité ID de périphérique et adresse réseau (voir au bas) Serveurs d’impression NetportExpress PRO externes (Ethernet et réseau en anneau à jeton) 4 Appuyez sur le bouton « diag » pour envoyer une page d’essai du serveur d’impression NetportExpress à l’imprimante. La page d’essai comprend l’ID de périphérique et diverses autres données de configuration. Connecteurs pour réseau en anneau à jeton 4 10Base-T BNC 10Base-T PC-3775 Exemples d’insertion, dans les imprimantes, de cartes de serveurs d’impression NetportExpress PRO. Votre imprimante peut être différente de celle illustrée. Assurez-vous que le connecteur d’imprimante de la carte est complètement inséré dans la fente de connecteur de l’imprimante. Bouton Diagnostics Connecteurs réseau RJ-45 et BNC Connecteurs réseau RJ-45 et DB-9 Bouton Diagnostics ID de périphérique Connecteur d’imprimante Carte de Interrupteurs réseau en anneau à jeton ID de périphérique Connecteur d’imprimante Carte Ethernet Serveur d’impression NetportExpress PRO interne (Ethernet et réseau en anneau à jeton) Installation du matériel PC-3124 PC-3126 5 • La carte de serveur d’impression PRO interne doit être connectée dans les fentes MIO de l’imprimante. • Pour obtenir la liste complète des imprimantes prises en charge, consultez la section sur le support clientèle automatisé Intel au dos de ce manuel. • Les imprimantes HP LaserJet* 4Si et 5Si comportent deux fentes MIO. Installez la carte de serveur d’impression NetportExpress PRO dans la fente inférieure. Pour obtenir les directives voulues, installez le logiciel Netport Manager sur n’importe quelle station de travail Windows en réseau et consultez l’aide en ligne ou consultez les documents de support Intel en ligne. • La carte pour réseau en anneau à jeton détecte automatiquement les débits de données lorsque les deux interrupteurs sont en position UP (réglage par défaut). (Voir la page 34 pour la liste des réglages.) Conseils d’installation d’un serveur d’impression interne Poursuivez l’installation du logiciel (voir la page 6). . . Installation de la carte de serveur d’impression PRO interne dans votre imprimante 1 Mettez l’imprimante hors tension et débranchez le câble d’alimentation. 2 Au besoin, retirez le capot de la fente MIO (entrée/sortie modulaire). 3 Notez l’ID de périphérique du serveur d’impression NetportExpress de façon à pouvoir l’utiliser plus tard. 4 Repérez le connecteur à l’arrière de la fente MIO. 5 Insérez la carte de serveur d’impression en veillant à aligner le connecteur de la carte avec le connecteur à l’arrière de la fente MIO. Lorsqu’elle est bien en place, la carte devrait reposer à plat contre le cadre de l’imprimante. 6 Fixez la carte de serveur d’impression en resserrant les vis. Vissez alternativement chacune des vis de façon à ce que la carte reste stable dans la fente. 7 Branchez le câble réseau qui convient. 8 Branchez le câble d’alimentation à l’imprimante et mettez celle-ci sous tension. 9 Appuyez sur le bouton Diagnostics de la carte de serveur d’impression NetportExpress pour faire imprimer une page d’essai. La page d’essai comprend l’ID de périphérique et diverses autres données de configuration. 6 Installation du logiciel Installation des logiciels UNIX et AIX Consultez la section sur la configuration NOS pour le système UNIX ou AIX. Installation du logiciel pour réseaux Novell et Microsoft L’installation du logiciel Netport Manager sur une station de travail Windows vous permet de gérer tous vos serveurs d’impression NetportExpress. Vous pouvez utiliser Netport Manager avec les systèmes Windows 3.1x, Windows pour Workgroups 3.11, Windows 95 et Windows NT 3.51 ou 4.0. Installation de Netport Manager 1 Insérez le CD-ROM dans l’unité du système Windows choisi. • Systèmes Windows 95 ou Windows NT 4.0. Le programme de configuration devrait être affiché automatiquement. Si ce n’est pas le cas, choisissez Démarrer et Exécuter et sélectionnez le contenu du lecteur de CD-ROM. • Windows 3.1x ou Windows NT 3.51. A partir du Gestionnaire de programmes, cliquez sur le menu Fichier et ensuite sur Exécuter. Sélectionnez le contenu du lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Exécutez setup.exe à partir du répertoire racine. 3 Installez Netport Manager et consultez ensuite la section NOS voulue pour configurer le serveur d’impression NetportExpress en fonction de votre système. Remarque : Si seul le protocole IP est utilisé sur le système où Netport Manager est installé, le serveur d’impression NetportExpress doit utiliser une adresse IP pour communi-quer avec Netport Manager. Imprimez une page d’essai pour savoir si une adresse IP a été définie pour le serveur d’impression. Le cas échéant, définissez cette adresse selon la marche à suivre décrite à la page 15. Configuration du serveur d’impression pour vos NOS. Consultez . . . Configuration de NDS de Novell NetWare ...................................... page 8 Configuration de Bindery de Novell NetWare ................................ page 10 Impression réseau dans l’environnement Microsoft ....................... page 12 Configuration de LAN Manager/LAN Server ................................ page 16 Configuration d’AppleTalk .............................................................. page 18 Configuration d’UNIX .................................................................... page 19 Configuration d’AIX ....................................................................... page 27 Remarque : Vous pouvez configurer chaque port du serveur d’impression NetportExpress pour utilisation de protocoles multiples. 7 Fenêtre principale de Netport Manager Cliquez sur le bouton Properties pour régler les paramètres matériels et les paramètres de nom pour Netport. Cliquez sur le bouton Configure pour configurer le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Création de disquettes d’installation Vous pouvez créer des disquettes d’installation pour les programmes suivants : • Netport Manager • Port Monitor (pour l’impression Microsoft Network) Les disquettes d’installation ainsi créées vous permettent d’installer ces programmes sur tout système équipé d’une unité de disquette 3 1/2. Pour créer les disquettes, insérer le CD-ROM dans le lecteur. A l’écran qui apparaît, cliquez sur Make Setup Disks. Web Netport Manager S’il n’y a aucune station de travail Windows sur votre réseau pour exécuter Netport Manager, vous pouvez installer votre serveur d’impression NetportExpress à l’aide de l’explorateur Web. Le serveur d’impression comprend un serveur http permettant d’afficher et de modifier les paramètres du serveur d’impression à partir de l’explorateur Web. Dans un tel cas, une adresse IP doit avoir été affectée au serveur d’impression. • Pour savoir si une telle adresse existe pour le serveur, imprimez une page d’essai à l’aide du bouton « diag » du serveur d’impression. • Consultez la rubrique « Définition d’une adresse IP », aux pages 15 et 20 pour savoir comment attribuer une telle adresse au serveur. • Consultez la rubrique « Utilisation de Web Netport Manager » à la page 31 pour savoir comment accéder à ce logiciel. 8 Avec ce mode, le serveur d’impression NetportExpress remplace le programme de serveur d’impression NetWare. Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress interroge la file d’attente du serveur de fichiers NetWare pour savoir si des tâches d’impression s’y trouvent et envoie ensuite chaque tâche directement à l’imprimante. Cette méthode accélère l’impression. Le mode serveur d’impression est recommandé car il assure la meilleure performance en termes d’impression. Pour pouvoir utiliser ce mode, vous devez disposer d’une licence d’utilisation NetWare pour chaque imprimante (y compris les serveurs d’impression multiports). Configuration du serveur d’impression en mode serveur d’impression NDS Remarque : Netport Manager crée les files d’attente ou les serveurs d’impression dont vous avez besoin pour l’installation de NetWare. Il n’est donc pas nécessaire de créer ces objets dans NWADMIN ou PCONSOLE. 1 Ouvrez une session en tant qu’Admin à la station de travail où Netport Manager a été installé. 2 Lancez Netport Manager. 3 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID de périphérique correspond au numéro du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure. 5 Sélectionnez Novell NDS Print Server. 6 Sélectionnez un contexte pour le serveur d’impression. Le contexte est en quelque sorte le contenant dans lequel l’objet serveur d’impression est créé. 7 Pour chaque imprimante connectée au serveur d’impression, cliquez sur un onglet Port et attribuez-lui une file d’attente existante ou encore ajoutez une nouvelle file. • Pour affecter une file d’attente existante, double-cliquez sur la file pour l’ajouter à la liste des files d’attente affectées (Assigned Queues). • Pour ajouter une nouvelle file, cliquez sur New Queues et créez-en une nouvelle. 8 Cliquez sur OK et quittez Netport Manager. Configuration d’une station de travail aux fins d’impression A chaque station de travail qui utilisera l’imprimante, utilisez la commande capture ou l’utilitaire d’impression de la station de travail pour rediriger l’impression à la file d’attente NetWare que vous avez définie. Pour des instructions complémentaires, consultez la rubrique sur l’aide NetportExpress pour l’impression sous NetWare. Configuration en mode serveur d’impression NDS de Novell NetWare Conseil pour le mode serveur d’impression NDS Pour les paramètres avancés comme LIP (paquets Internet), consultez la rubrique « Gestion du serveur d’impression NetportExpress » à la page 30. 9 Dans ce mode, PSERVER.NLM interroge la file d’attente du serveur de fichiers NetWare pour savoir si des tâches d’impression s’y trouvent et envoie ensuite la tâche d’impression au serveur d’impression, qui achemine les données à l’imprimante. Aucune licence d’utilisateur NetWare n’est nécessaire pour les serveurs d’impression NetportExpress. Ce mode n’est toutefois pas recommandé car il est beaucoup plus lent que le mode serveur d’impression. Configuration du serveur d’impression en mode imprimante distante NDS pour Novell NetWare 1 Ouvrez une session en tant qu’Admin à la station de travail où Netport Manager a été installé. 2 S’il n’existe pas de serveur d’impression, créez-en un à l’aide de NWADMIN ou de PCONSOLE. 3 Lancez Netport Manager. 4 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID de périphérique correspond au numéro du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé. 5 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure. 6 Sélectionnez Novell NDS Remote Printer. 7 Sélectionnez un contexte pour le serveur d’impression. Le contexte est le contenant dans lequel l’objet serveur d’impression est créé. 8 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression NDS de Novell que vous avez créé dans NWADMIN ou PCONSOLE. 9 Pour chaque imprimante connectée au serveur d’impression, cliquez sur un onglet Port et attribuez-lui une file d’attente existante ou encore ajoutez une nouvelle file. • Pour affecter une file d’attente existante, double-cliquez sur la file pour l’ajouter à la liste des files d’attente affectées (Assigned Queues). • Pour ajouter une nouvelle file, cliquez sur New Queues et créez-en une nouvelle. 10 Cliquez sur OK et fermez Netport Manager. 11 Déchargez, puis rechargez PSERVER.NLM pour activer les modifications. Configuration d’une station de travail aux fins d’impression A chaque station de travail qui utilisera l’imprimante, utilisez la commande capture ou l’utilitaire d’impression de la station de travail pour rediriger l’impression à la file d’attente NetWare que vous avez définie. Pour des instructions complémentaires, consultez la rubrique sur l’aide NetportExpress pour l’impression sous NetWare. Configuration du mode imprimante distante NDS de Novell NetWare 10 Avec ce mode, le serveur d’impression NetportExpress remplace le programme de serveur d’impression NetWare. Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress interroge la file d’attente du serveur de fichiers NetWare pour savoir si des tâches d’impression s’y trouvent et envoie ensuite chaque tâche directement à l’imprimante. Cette méthode accélère l’impression. Le mode serveur d’impression est recommandé car il assure la meilleure performance en termes d’impression. Pour pouvoir utiliser ce mode, vous devez disposer d’une licence d’utilisation NetWare pour chaque imprimante (y compris les serveurs d’impression multiports). Configuration du serveur d’impression en mode serveur d’impression bindery Remarque : Netport Manager crée les files d’attente ou les serveurs d’impression dont vous avez besoin pour l’installation de NetWare. Il n’est donc pas nécessaire de créer ces objets dans NWADMIN ou PCONSOLE. 1 Connectez-vous en tant que Supervisor à partir de la station de travail où Netport Manager a été installé. 2 Lancez Netport Manager. 3 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID de périphérique correspond au numéro du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure. 5 Sélectionnez Novell Bindery Print Server. 6 Sélectionnez le serveur de fichiers où le serveur d’impression va être créé. 7 Pour chaque imprimante connectée au serveur d’impression, cliquez sur un onglet Port et attribuez-lui une file d’attente existante ou encore ajoutez une nouvelle file. • Pour affecter une file d’attente existante, double-cliquez sur la file pour l’ajouter à la liste des files d’attente affectées (Assigned Queues). • Pour ajouter une nouvelle file, cliquez sur New Queues et créez-en une nouvelle. 8 Cliquez sur OK et quittez Netport Manager. Configuration d’une station de travail aux fins d’impression A chaque station de travail qui utilisera l’imprimante, utilisez la commande capture ou l’utilitaire d’impression de la station de travail pour rediriger l’impression à la file d’attente NetWare que vous avez définie. Pour des instructions complémentaires, consultez la rubrique sur l’aide NetportExpress pour l’impression sous NetWare. Conseil pour le mode serveur d’impression bindery Pour les paramètres avancés comme LIP (paquets Internet), consultez la rubrique « Gestion du serveur d’impression NetportExpress » à la page 30. Configuration du mode serveur d’impression Bindery de Novell NetWare 11 Dans ce mode, PSERVER.NLM interroge la file d’attente du serveur de fichiers NetWare pour savoir si des tâches d’impression s’y trouvent et envoie ensuite la tâche d’impression au serveur d’impression NetportExpress, qui achemine les données à l’imprimante. Aucune licence d’utilisateur NetWare n’est nécessaire pour les serveurs d’impression NetportExpress. Ce mode n’est toutefois pas recommandé car il est beaucoup plus lent que le mode serveur d’impression. Configuration du serveur d’impression en mode imprimante distante bindery 1 Connectez-vous en tant que Supervisor à partir de la station de travail où Netport Manager a été installé. 2 S’il n’existe pas de serveur d’impression, créez-en un à l’aide de NWADMIN ou de PCONSOLE. 3 Lancez Netport Manager. 4 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID de périphérique correspond au numéro du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé. 5 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure. 6 Sélectionnez Novell Bindery Remote Printer. 7 Choisissez le serveur de fichiers où le serveur d’impression bindery de Novell se trouve. (Il s’agit du serveur de fichiers où PSERVER est exécuté.) 8 Dans la liste des serveurs d’impression bindery de Novell, sélectionnez le module PSERVER que vous désirez utiliser. 9 Pour chaque imprimante connectée au serveur d’impression, cliquez sur un onglet Port et attribuez-lui une file d’attente existante ou encore ajoutez une nouvelle file. • Pour affecter une file d’attente existante, double-cliquez sur la file pour l’ajouter à la liste des files d’attente affectées (Assigned Queues). • Pour ajouter une nouvelle file, cliquez sur New Queues et créez-en une nouvelle. 10 Cliquez sur OK et fermez Netport Manager. 11 Déchargez, puis rechargez PSERVER.NLM sur le serveur de fichiers indiqué à l’étape 6, pour activer les modifications. Configuration d’une station de travail aux fins d’impression A chaque station de travail qui utilisera l’imprimante, utilisez la commande capture ou l’utilitaire d’impression de la station de travail pour rediriger l’impression à la file d’attente NetWare que vous avez définie. Pour des instructions complémentaires, consultez la rubrique sur l’aide NetportExpress pour l’impression sous NetWare. Configuration du mode imprimante distante bindery de Novell NetWare 12 Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress permet l’impression de documents sur des stations de travail reliées en réseau fonctionnant sous Windows* 95, Windows NT*, ou Windows pour Workgroups*. A l’aide de NetportExpress Port Monitor sur une station de travail Windows 95 ou Windows NT, vous pouvez également partager des imprimantes avec d’autres systèmes, y compris Windows pour Workgroups et LAN Manager ou LAN Server. Options d’impression • Partage d’imprimantes : Installez le NetportExpress Port Monitor dans un système Windows puis partagez le port avec les autres stations de travail Windows. La station de travail sur laquelle Port Monitor est installé spoule les travaux d’impression et les achemine au serveur d’impression NetportExpress. • Impression directe : Installez le NetportExpress Port Monitor sur chaque station de travail Windows puis imprimez directement sur le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Configuration du serveur d’impression pour l’impression en réseau de Microsoft 1 Démarrez Netport Manager. 2 Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans la fenêtre de Netport Manager. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure. 4 Cliquez sur Microsoft Network Printing. 5 Tapez le nom et le domaine du serveur d’impression. 6 Pour chaque imprimante connectée au serveur d’impression, cliquez sur l’onglet Port et indiquez le nom du port de l’imprimante connectée à ce port. Configuration des stations de travail pour l’impression Pour imprimer à partir de Windows 95 et de Windows NT, installez le Intel NetportExpress Port Monitor. Le Port Monitor s’installe sur le système en tant que port local que vous pouvez partager avec d’autres systèmes. Impression réseau dans l’environnement Microsoft PC-3791 PARALLEL 1 PARALLEL 2 SERIAL POWER BNC RJ-45 TEST NetportExpress PRO Activity Transmit Receive PARALLEL 1 PARALLEL 2 SERIAL POWER BNC RJ-45 TEST NetportExpress PRO Activity Transmit Receive 13 Configuration d’un système pour impression directe ou partagée Station de travail Windows 95 1 Insérez le CD du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans le lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Si le programme Setup ne démarre pas automatiquement, tapez setup.exe à partir du lecteur de CD-ROM. 3 Dans Setup, cliquez sur le bouton NetportExpress Port Monitor. Lorsque l’installation est terminée, vous êtes prêt à configurer l’impression de la station de travail. 4 Dans l’icône My Computer, cliquez deux fois sur le dossier Printers. 5 Cliquez deux fois sur Add Printer et suivez les instructions en vue de configurer une imprimante locale temporaire sur LPT1. N’imprimez pas de page d’essai. 6 Une fois que l’assistant Add Printer a terminé, cliquez sur la nouvelle imprimante avec le bouton droit de la souris puis cliquez sur Properties. 7 Cliquez sur Details, puis sur Add Port. 8 Cliquez sur Other, sélectionnez Intel NetportExpress Network Port et cliquez sur OK. 9 Cliquez sur Browse pour sélectionner Domaine, serveur d’impression Netport et port où votre imprimante est connectée au serveur d’impression NetportExpress. 10 Pour partager l’imprimante : dans Properties, cliquez sur l’onglet Sharing. Sélectionnez Shared As et indiquez le nom de l’imprimante partagée. Pour configurer un système Windows NT 4.0 1 Insérez le CD du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans le lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Si le programme Setup ne démarre pas automatiquement, tapez setup.exe à partir du lecteur de CD-ROM. 3 Dans Setup, cliquez sur le bouton NetportExpress Port Monitor. Lorsque l’installation est terminée, vous êtes prêt à configurer l’impression de votre système. 4 Dans l’icône My Computer, cliquez deux fois sur le dossier Printers. 5 Cliquez deux fois sur Add Printer puis sélectionnez My Computer. 6 Suivez les instructions pour configurer une imprimante locale temporaire sur LPT1. N’imprimez pas de page d’essai. 7 Une fois que l’assistant Add Printer a terminé, cliquez sur la nouvelle imprimante avec le bouton droit de la souris puis cliquez sur Properties. 8 Cliquez sur Ports, puis sur Add Port. 9 Sélectionnez Intel NetportExpress Network Port puis cliquez sur New Port. 14 10 Cliquez sur Browse afin de sélectionner le domaine, le serveur d’impression Netport ainsi que le port sur lequel votre imprimante est connectée au serveur d’impression NetportExpress. 11 Pour partager l’imprimante : dans Properties, cliquez sur l’onglet Sharing. Sélectionnez Shared et indiquez le nom de l’imprimante partagée. Pour configurer un système Windows NT 3.51 1 Insérez le CD du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans le lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Tapez la commande setup.exe à partir du CD. 3 Dans Setup, cliquez sur le bouton NetportExpress Port Monitor. Lorsque l’installation est terminée, vous êtes prêt à configurer l’impression de votre système. 4 Démarrez Print Manager. 5 Dans le menu Printer, cliquez sur Create Printer. 6 Dans la fenêtre Create Printer, tapez le nom d’une imprimante. 7 Sélectionnez le gestionnaire de l’imprimante. 8 Dans le champ Print to list, sélectionnez Other. 9 Sélectionnez Intel NetportExpress Network Port puis cliquez sur OK. 10 Cliquer sur Browse pour sélectionner le domaine, le serveur d’impression et le port sur lequel votre imprimante est connectée au serveur d’impression. 11 Pour partager l’imprimante : dans Print Manager, sélectionnez l’imprimante. Dans le menu Printer, sélectionnez Properties. Cliquez sur Share This Printer on the Network puis indiquez le nom de l’imprimante partagée. Configuration des systèmes pour partager une imprimante Station de travail Windows 95 ou Windows NT 4.0 pour imprimer sur une imprimante partagée 1 Dans l’icône My Computer, ouvrez le dossier Printers. 2 Ouvrez Add Printer afin de démarrer l’assistant Add Printer. 3 Sélectionnez Network Printer puis indiquez le nom de l’imprimante partagée qui est installée sur le poste où réside le NetportExpress Port Monitor. Station de travail Windows NT 3.51 pour imprimer sur une imprimante partagée 1 Démarrez Print Manager puis cliquez sur le menu Printer. 2 Sélectionnez Connect to Printer. 3 Sélectionnez la nouvelle imprimante dans la liste Shared Printers puis indiquez le nom de l’imprimante partagée que vous avez installée sur le poste où réside le NetportExpress Port Monitor. 15 Impression avec Windows pour Workgroups Remarque : NetportExpress Port Monitor ne peut être exécuté sous Windows pour Workgroups. Toutefois, vous pouvez partager une imprimante avec le système Windows 95 ou Windows NT sur lequel est exécuté NetportExpress Port Monitor (voir pages 12-13). Configuration d’une station de travail Windows pour Workgroups pour imprimer sur une imprimante partagée 1 Dans Print Manager, cliquez sur le menu Printer puis cliquez sur Connect to Printer. 2 Dans la fenêtre Connect to Printer, sélectionnez le nom de l’imprimante partagée qui est installée sur le système Windows 95 ou Windows NT où réside le NetportExpress Port Monitor. Configuration d’une station de travail Windows pour Workgroups pour imprimer directement sur une imprimante 1 Démarrez Print Manager sur le système Windows pour Workgroups. 2 Ouvrez Printers. 3 Dans le menu Printers, sélectionnez Connect to Printer. 4 Sélectionnez la nouvelle imprimante dans la liste Show Shared Printers. Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress sera affiché dans le domaine que vous avez indiqué dans Netport Manager. Impression sous Windows NT à l’aide de LPR Vous pouvez imprimer sous Windows NT à l’aide de lpr. Cette méthode est décrite dans l’aide de NetportExpress. Une adresse IP doit avoir été affectée au serveur d’impression NetportExpress pour pouvoir imprimer à l’aide de lpr. Configuration d’une adresse IP à l’aide de ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) 1 Assurez-vous d’être dans le même segment de réseau que le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. 2 A partir d’une station de travail Windows NT ou Windows 95, allez à l’invite. 3 Tapez : arp -s ip_address network_address où ip_address représente l’adresse IP que vous désirez affecter au serveur d’impression NetportExpress. network_address représente l’adresse réseau de 12 caractères qui est imprimée au bas du serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Pour Windows NT, cette adresse doit être entrée sous la forme : xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. Exemple : 00-A0-C9-12-34-56 4 Définissez l’adresse IP dans le serveur d’impression en tapant pingip_address où ip_address représente l’adresse que vous avez utilisée à l’étape 3. 16 Pour imprimer dans LAN Manager de Microsoft et LAN Server d’IBM, la station de travail transmet un travail d’impression à un procédé d’impression et le travail d’impression est mis dans une file d’attente d’impression puis acheminé au serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Le serveur d’impression achemine ensuite le travail d’impression vers l’imprimante sur l’un des ports auxquels il est connecté. Si vous disposez d’une station de travail Windows 95 ou Windows NT sur le réseau, vous pouvez également imprimer à l’aide de l’impression en réseau de Microsoft (voir pages 12-15). Configuration du serveur d’impression NetportExpress Remarque : Netport Manager ne peut être exécuté que sur des stations de travail fonctionnant sous Windows. Si vous ne disposez que des stations de travail fonctionnant sous OS/2* sur votre réseau, vous pouvez utiliser Web Netport Manager pour configurer votre serveur d’impression NetportExpress (voir « Utilisation de Web Netport Manager » à la page 31). 1 Démarrez Netport Manager. 2 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID correspond à celle du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure. 4 Sélectionnez Microsoft Network Printing (pour LAN Manager) ou sélectionnez LAN Server. 5 Sélectionnez le domaine où vous désirez que réside le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. 6 Tapez le nom d’un port pour l’imprimante partagée ainsi qu’une brève description. Configuration de l’impression d’une station de travail OS/2 sur LAN Manager de Microsoft 1 A l’invite d’OS/2 sur le serveur LAN Manager, redirigez l’impression vers le serveur d’impression NetportExpress en tapant ce qui suit sur une ligne : NET USE LPT2: \\NETPORT\PORT où : LPT2 est l’ID. NETPORT est le nom que vous avez donné au serveur d’impression. PORT est le nom du port que vous avez utilisé pour l’imprimante partagée. 2 Cliquez sur Print Manager sur le même serveur, sélectionnez Configure/ Queue dans le menu, puis cliquez sur Add. 3 Tapez un nom, une description, une file d’attente ainsi que toute autre option que vous souhaitez modifier puis cliquez sur Add. 4 Cliquez sur OK. 5 Retournez à l’invite d’OS/2 puis tapez : NET ADMIN Configuration pour LAN Manager/LAN Server 17 6 Dans le menu principal, sélectionnez View/Share the Resource, puis cliquez sur Add. 7 Dans la zone de liste, sélectionnez Printer puis cliquez sur Add. 8 Définissez le nom de la file d’attente en utilisant le nom de la file d’attente que vous avez défini dans les étapes précédentes. 9 Tapez le nom de l’imprimante partagée ainsi que les autres paramètres requis puis cliquez sur OK. 10 Cliquez sur Finish. Définissez l’entrée requise à l’écran suivant puis cliquez sur OK/Finish. 11 Dans le menu principal, cliquez sur View/Exit puis retournez à l’invite. 12 A l’invite, confirmez les paramètres sélectionnés en tapant NET SHARE. Remarque : Pour interrompre le réacheminement, utilisez une commande telle que NET USE LPT2: /DELETE Configuration de l’impression à partir d’une station de travail OS/2 sur LAN Server d’IBM 1 A l’invite d’OS/2 sur le serveur LAN Server, réacheminez l’impression sur le serveur d’impression NetportExpress en tapant la commande suivante sur une seule ligne : NET USE LPT2: \\NETPORT\PORT où : LPT2 est l’ID. NETPORT est le nom que vous avez donné au serveur d’impression. PORT est le nom du port que vous avez utilisé pour l’imprimante partagée. 2 Sur le bureau OS/2, ouvrez Templates. 3 Glissez et déposez le modèle de l’imprimante dans un dossier sur le bureau. 4 Dans la fenêtre Create a Printer, tapez le nom que vous souhaitez utiliser pour l’imprimante. 5 Sélectionnez LPT1. 6 Dans la liste des gestionnaires, sélectionnez Corresponding Printer Drivers. 7 Cliquez sur Create. 8 Cliquez sur OK. 9 Indiquez si vous voulez que le système installe une configuration d’imprimante équivalente pour WIN-OS2, et partager l’imprimante que vous avez créée. Remarque : Pour interrompre le réacheminement, utilisez une commande telle que NET USE LPT2: /DELETE Partage de l’imprimante que vous avez créée Cliquez sur le coin gauche supérieur de l’icône de l’imprimante. Dans le menu déroulant qui est affiché, sélectionnez Share Printer afin de partager l’imprimante sur le réseau. 18 Configuration du serveur d’impression NetportExpress pour AppleTalk 1 A la station de travail Windows où vous avez installé Netport Manager, démarrez ce programme. 2 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID correspond au numéro du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure. 4 Sélectionnez AppleTalk. 5 Sélectionnez un nom de zone pour le serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans le champ Zone de AppleTalk. 6 Cliquez sur l’onglet d’un port. 7 Dans le champ Chooser Name, tapez le nom qui doit apparaître pour ce port dans la fenêtre Chooser sur les stations de travail Macintosh. 8 Identifiez le type d’imprimante sur laquelle le serveur d’impression est connecté. Ce nom doit correspondre au nom du pilote d’imprimante indiqué dans Chooser. Le type LaserWriter* utilisé par défaut fonctionne pour tout type d’imprimante PostScript*. 9 Sélectionnez le groupe de polices qui réside dans l’imprimante. La sélection par défaut est 35. Remarque : Si votre imprimante prend en charge la communication bidirectionnelle, le groupe par défaut sera « automatically set by the printer ». 10 Cliquez sur OK pour terminer la configuration. Configuration de l’impression d’une station de travail 1 A un poste Apple, ouvrez Chooser. 2 Sélectionnez le gestionnaire d’imprimante pour l’imprimante qui est connectée au serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Si vous utilisez une imprimante PostScript, vous pouvez sélectionner l’icône de l’imprimante LaserWriter ou PostScript pour votre imprimante. 3 Si une liste AppleTalk Zone est affichée dans la fenêtre du Chooser, sélectionnez la zone que vous avez indiquée lors de la configuration du serveur d’impression. 4 Sélectionnez le nom du Chooser du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous souhaitez que la station de travail Macintosh utilise. 5 Fermez la fenêtre duChooser. Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress peut prendre en charge les impressions acheminées par les stations de travail Macintosh* reliées à un réseau Ethernet ou à un réseau en anneau à jeton. Pour imprimer à l’aide de LocalTalk*, connectez le serveur d’impression à un routeur sur un segment du réseau Ethernet. Configuration pour AppleTalk 19 Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress prend en charge de nombreuses configurations des systèmes UNIX en offrant différentes méthodes d’impression. La méthode d’impression recommandée utilise proprint, qui vous permet de visualiser l’état de l’impression dans un fichier journal. Vous pouvez également utiliser lpr/lpd et ftp. (L’impression à l’aide de FTP est décrite dans l’aide du Web NetportExpress.) L’installation du logiciel proinstall pour UNIX vous permet d’obtenir les fichiers requis pour utiliser proprint. Le logiciel contient également les fichiers de mise à jour de UNIX. Système Instructions de démarrage (tapez la commande sur une ligne) HP-UX mount -t cdfs -o ro /dev/dsk/c1d1s0 /cdrom/npcdrom SCO mount -f ISO9660 -o ro,lower /dev/cd0 /cdrom/npcdrom Solaris 2.x mount -F hsfs -r /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s2 /cdrom/npcdrom SunOS 4.1.3 mount -t hsfs -o ro /dev/sr0 /cdrom/npcdrom UnixWare mount -F cdfs -r /dev/cdrom/c0b0t2l0 /cdrom/npcdrom Installation du logiciel (utilisateurs de AIX, passez à la page 27) Nota : Installez le logiciel si vous utilisez proprint ou si vous souhaitez consulter les fichiers de mise à jour. 1 Connectez-vous à une station de travail UNIX en tant que root. 2 Tapez ls-l /cdrom/npcdrom afin de déterminer si le répertoire d’installation existe déjà. Dans le cas contraire, créez-le en tapant mkdir -p /cdrom/npcdrom 3 Insérez le CD-ROM dans le lecteur d’une station de travail UNIX. Si votre système ne prend pas en charge le démarrage automatique, procédez comme suit : Configuration pour des réseaux UNIX 4 Extrayez le logiciel proinstall du CD-ROM sur votre station de travail UNIX hôte. Pour ce faire, tapez sur une ligne : tar xvf /cdrom/npcdrom/unix/prounix.tar/usr/intl/ proinstall 5 Extrayez proprint ainsi que les fichiers du système d’exploitation. Pour ce faire, tapez sur une ligne : tar xvf /cdrom/npcdrom/unix/prounix.tar/usr/intl/ sous-répertoire où sous-répertoire est l’un des suivants : solx86 (Solaris 2.x x86) solaris (solaris 2.x SPARC) sco sun (SunOS 4.1.x) unixware hpux 20 Configuration d’une adresse IP sous UNIX Une adresse IP doit avoir été affectée au serveur d’impression NetportExpress pour imprimer sous UNIX. Le serveur d’impression tente par défaut d’obtenir une adresse IP... à l’aide de RARP, BOOTP, et DHCP. Le serveur d’impression et la station de travail ou le serveur qui exécute les commandes doivent être connectés au même sous-réseau et ne doivent pas en être séparés par des routeurs. Réglage manuel d’une adresse IP pour UNIX à l’aide d’ARP 1 Connectez-vous à une station de travail UNIX en tant que root. 2 Utilisez un éditeur de texte d’UNIX tel que vi pour ajouter l’adresse IP de Netport ainsi que le nom d’hôte dans le fichier /etc/hosts. 3 Enregistrez le serveur d’impression sur votre station de travail en tapant arp -s netportexpress network_address temp où netportexpress est l’adresse IP ou le nom d’hôte du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans le ficher /etc/hosts. network_address est l’adresse du réseau NetportExpress sur la page d’essai d’impression ou au bas du serveur d’impression. Sous UNIX, cette adresse doit être entrée en segments de deux chiffres séparés par des deux points. Exemple : 00:AA:00:1E:5D:B8 Remarque : Pour obtenir une adresse IP que vous pouvez utiliser pour le serveur d’impression NetportExpress, adressez-vous à votre administrateur de réseau. 4 Définissez l’adresse IP de NetworkExpress en tapant ping netportexpress où Netportexpress est l’adresse IP ou le nom d’hôte du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans le fichier /etc/hosts. Utilisation de telnet afin de définir les paramètres tels que le masque du sous-réseau et la passerelle par défaut 1 Sur la station de travail UNIX, utilisez telnet pour accéder au serveur d’impression. Tapez : telnet ip_address où adresse_ip_netportcorrespond à l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression NetportExpress. 2 Connectez-vous en tant que root. 3 Tapez le mot de passe du serveur d’impression NetportExpress, ou appuyez sur Entrée si aucun mot de passe n’est requis. 4 Dans le menu principal, sélectionnez TCP/IP Configuration. 5 Sélectionnez l’option que vous souhaitez modifier puis appuyez sur Entrée. 6 Définissez les paramètres que vous souhaitez configurer puis appuyez sur Entrée. 7 Quittez telnet. 21 Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress offre deux méthodes d’impression : en utilisant proprint ou lpr/lpd. Le logiciel proprint, qui est fourni avec le serveur d’impression NetportExpress, vous permet de visualiser l’état de l’impression grâce à un fichier journal. Comme l’indique le tableau qui suit, la plupart des systèmes peuvent utiliser proprint. Les instructions s’appliquent à la configuration de l’impression avec proprint et lpd/lpr. Système d’exploitation Impression avec proprint Impression avec lpr/lpd HP-UX X X SCO X X Solaris X X SunOS X X UnixWare X X Autres systèmes BSD X La plupart des versions 4 du système V X Configuration de l’impression de la station de travail avec proprint (HP-UX, SCO, Solaris, SunOS, Unixware) 1 Assurez-vous que vous avez déjà installé le logiciel et que vous êtes connecté à une station de travail UNIX en tant que root. 2 A l’invite de la station de travail UNIX, tapez cd /usr/intl 3 Tapez ./proinstall 4 Sélectionnez la plate-forme UNIX que vous désirez. 5 Dans le menu principal de proinstall, sélectionnez l’option 2. 6 Suivez les directives affichées à l’écran pour entrer l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression NetportExpress. 7 Sélectionnez le mode d’impression. Le mode PostScript est utilisé pour la plupart des impressions PostScript et PCL (Printer Command Language). Ne choisissez le mode texte que si vous imprimez des fichiers de texte UNIX. 8 Suivez les directives affichées à l’écran pour entrer le nom de l’imprimante. 9 Suivez les directives affichées à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. 10 Faites un essai d’impression de façon à vérifier votre configuration de l’hôte UNIX. Configuration de l’impression à partir d’une station de travail UNIX 22 Configuration de l’impression d’une station de travail à l’aide de lpr/ lpd dans les environnements Solaris, Unixware et versions 4 du système V 1 Connectez-vous à votre station de travail UNIX en tant que root. 2 Dans le fichier /etc/hosts, ajoutez un nom d’hôte unique et une adresse IP pour chaque serveur d’impression NetportExpress à configurer. 3 Configurez la file d’attente d’impression et l’imprimante distante. Vous pouvez utiliser l’utilitaire System Administration pour ajouter une imprimante distante de type BSD, ou vous pouvez l’ajouter à partir d’une ligne de commande en tapant l’une des séquences suivantes. a Tapez : lpsystem -t bsd host où host correspond au nom du serveur d’impression de l’étape 2 cidessus. b Tapez le nom de l’imprimante. • Pour imprimer des fichiers PostScript ou PCL, tapez sur une ligne : lpadmin -p printer -s host!port -I postscript,simple • Pour imprimer des fichiers texte UNIX standard, tapez sur une ligne : lpadmin -p printer -s host!port-I simple où : printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente de l’imprimante. host correspond au nom du serveur d’impression de l’étape 2 ci-dessus. port définit une imprimante distante rattachée au serveur d’impression NetportExpress comme suit LPT1_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT (port parallèle 1 ou la carte interne) LPT2_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT (pour port parallèle 2) COM1_PASSTHRU ou COM1_TEXT (pour le port série) Remarque : Utilisez PASSTHRU pour les impressions en mode PCL et PostScript ou pour les fichiers d’application, et utilisez TEXT si vous imprimez des fichiers texte UNIX standard. c Tapez : accept printer enable printer où : printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente de l’imprimante. 23 4 Mettez à l’essai la configuration de l’impression. Tapez à l’invite : ping host lp -d printer file où : host correspond au nom du serveur d’impression de l’étape 2 ci-dessus. printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente de l’imprimante. file correspond au nom du fichier à imprimer. Configuration de l’impression à l’aide de lpr/lpd sous HP-UX 1 Connectez-vous à votre station de travail HP-UX en tant que root. 2 Dans le fichier /etc/hosts, ajoutez un nom d’hôte unique et une adresse IP pour chaque serveur d’impression NetportExpress à configurer. 3 Configurez la file d’attente d’impression et l’imprimante distante. 4 Tapez : lpshut 5 Tapez sur une ligne : lpadmin -pprinter -v/dev/null -ormhost orpport -ob3 où printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente du poste local. host correspond au serveur d’impression NetportExpress. port définit une imprimante distante rattachée au serveur d’impression NetportExpress comme suit LPT1_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT (pour port parallèle 1 ou la carte interne) LPT2_PASSTHRU ou LPT2_TEXT (pour port parallèle 2) COM1_PASSTHRU ou COM1_TEXT (pour le port série) Remarque : Utilisez PASSTHRU pour les impressions en mode PCL et PostScript ou pour les fichiers d’application, et utilisez TEXT si vous imprimez des fichiers texte UNIX standard. 6 Tapez : accept printer enable printer lpsched où printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente du poste local. 24 Configuration de l’impression à l’aide de lpr/lpd sous SunOS et autres systèmes d’exploitation inspirés de BSD 1 Connectez-vous à votre station de travail UNIX en tant que root. 2 Ajoutez l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression NetportExpress et le nom d’hôte dans le fichier /etc/hosts sur l’hôte BSD. 3 Ajoutez les entrées suivantes pour l’imprimante en bas du fichier /etc/ printcap. printer_name|alternate_name|comment:\ :lp=:\ :rm=host:\ :rp=port:\ :mx#0:\ :lf=/usr/spool/lpd/errorlog:\ :sd=/usr/spool/lpd/printer_name: IMPORTANT : La dernière entrée doit être suivie de deux points (:) et non pas d’une barre oblique inverse (\). où : printer_name|alternate_name correspond au nom de l’imprimante et au nom de l’imprimante de remplacement. Exemple : lj3ps|LaserJet_IIIsi comment correspond à un commentaire facultatif. Exemple : printer_on_port_1 :lp correspond à un champ obligatoire. host définit un nom d’hôte. Utilisez soit l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression NetportExpress ou le nom du serveur d’impression tel qu’il apparaît dans le fichier /etc/hosts. port définit une imprimante distante rattachée au serveur d’impression NetportExpress comme suit : LPT1_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT (pour port parallèle 1 ou la carte interne) LPT2_PASSTHRU ou LPT2_TEXT (pour port parallèle 2) COM1_PASSTHRU ou COM1_TEXT (pour le port série) Remarque : Utilisez PASSTHRU en mode PCL et PostScript ou pour imprimer des fichiers d’application, et utilisez TEXT pour imprimer des fichiers texte UNIX standard. mx#0 fournit un espace mémoire-tampon illimité. /usr/spool/lpd/errorlogdéfinit l’emplacement du fichier journal d’erreurs. /usr/spool/lpd/printer_name définit un répertoire pour les fichiers spoulés. 25 4 Accédez à l’invite shell puis créez un répertoire spoulé pour l’imprimante, si celui-ci n’existe pas. Pour ce faire, tapez les commandes suivantes : mkdir spool_directory chown daemon spool_directory chgrp daemon spool_directory chmod 775 spool_directory où : spool_directory est indiqué dans le fichier /etc/printcap par l’option sd=. (Exemple : /usr/spool/lpd/lj3ps) 5 Activez la file d’attente de l’imprimante en tapant les commandes suivantes : lpc enable printer où : printer correspond à l’imprimante locale indiquée dans le fichier /etc/ printcap (par exemple : lj3ps ) 6 Activez l’impression en tapant les commandes suivantes : lpc start printer où : PRINTER correspond à l’imprimante locale indiquée dans le fichier /etc/ printcap (lj3ps dans le modèle printcap) 7 Testez la configuration en tapant : ping host lpr -P printer file où : host correspond au nom du serveur d’impression NetportExpress tel qu’il apparaît dans le fichier /etc/hosts. printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente de l’imprimante. file correspond au nom du fichier à imprimer. 26 Mise à niveau du logiciel microprogrammé à l’aide de TFTP Les mises à niveau peuvent être installées avec TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol). Vous devez avoir accès à un hôte UNIX sur lequel est exécuté le démon TFTP contenant les fichiers de mise à jour. Mise à niveau du logiciel microprogrammé à l’aide de TFTP Suivez les étapes 1 à 4 pour initialiser le démon TFTP. S’il est déjà en cours d’exécution, passez à l’étape 5. 1 Modifiez le fichier /etc/inetd.conf. A partir de votre station de travail, tapez une entrée pour votre démon TFTP. Exemple : (pour les utilisateurs de systèmes Solaris) tapez sur une seule ligne : tftp dgram upd wait root /usr/sbin/in.tftpd in.tftpd -s/usr/local/tftpboot où /usr/local/tftpboot correspond au répertoire de connexion ftp. 2 Sauvegardez le fichier inetd.conf. 3 Utilisez la commande grep pour rechercher l’ID du processus démon inetd. Vous en aurez besoin pour réinitialiser le démon inet. Tapez ps -ef | grep -v grep | grep inetd exemple de sortie : root 104 1 80 Dec 13 ? 0:01 /usr/sbin/ inetd -s où 104 représente l’ID du processus démon inetd. 4 Réinitialisez le démon inet. Tapez kill -HUP process_ID où process_ID représente l’ID du processus démon inetd obtenu à l’étape 3 ci-dessus (104 dans l’exemple). 5 Copiez nppro.upd (fichier de mise à jour du réseau) dans le répertoire de connexion de votre démon TFTP. 6 Tapez telnet adresse IP de NetportExpress pour vous connecter au serveur d’impression. 7 Dans le menu principal telnet, sélectionnez Utilities, puis Network Update. 8 Entrez l’adresse IP du serveur TFTP, ainsi que le chemin et le nom du fichier de mise à jour du réseau. 9 Choisissez yes pour poursuivre la procédure de mise à jour du réseau. Network Update ferme la connexion telnet. 10 Lorsque la procédure de mise à jour du réseau est terminée, vous pouvez alors taper telnet netportexpress_ip_address pour communiquer avec le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. 27 Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress d’Intel peut imprimer dans l’environnement AIX à l’aide de lpr/lpd. Pour configurer l’impression dans l’environnement AIX, utilisez SMIT (System Management Interface Tool). Pour les deux versions (4.1 et 3.2.5), suivre les étapes qui suivent : • Installation du logiciel • Définition de l’adresse IP Consultez la section portant sur l’impression dans la documentation de votre système AIX pour connaître l’ensemble de la procédure de configuration. Installation du logiciel 1 Connectez-vous à une station de travail AIX en tant que root. 2 Démarrez le CD-Rom dans /cdrom/npcdrom en tapant Mount -v cdrfs -o ro /dev/cd0 /cdrom/npcdrom où /dev/cd0 correspond au fichier du périphérique du lecteur de CD-ROM. Il s’agit d’un fichier système. Consultez la documentation du système pour connaître le nom exact du fichier. 3 Extrayez proflash et les autres fichiers du système d’exploitation en tapant sur une ligne : tar xvf /cdrom/npcdrom/unix/prounix.tar /usr/intl/ aix 4 Faites un test d’impression en appuyant sur le bouton « diag » sur le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Définition de l’adresse IP 1 Connectez-vous à votre station de travail AIX en tant que root. 2 Ajoutez une entrée à la table d’hôte en tapant smit mkhostent 3 Allez à l’invite puis tapez sur une ligne : arp -s ether ip_address netport_address temp où ip_address correspond à l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression NetportExpress. netport_address correspond à l’adresse réseau du serveur d’impression indiqué, au bas du serveur d’impression. • Pour obtenir une adresse IP que vous pourrez utiliser pour le serveur d’impression NetportExpress, adressez-vous à votre administrateur de réseau. • Pour connaître l’adresse de réseau du serveur d’impression, regardez au bas du serveur d’impression ou sur la page d’essai de l’impression. Configuration en environnement AIX 28 4 Entrez l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans le champ Internet Address et le nom d’hôte de ce serveur dans le champ Host Name (Host Name représente n’importe quel nom d’hôte correct, choisi sous UNIX). 5 Appuyez sur la touche F12 pour quitter smit. 6 Connectez-vous au serveur d’impression NetportExpress en tapant : telnet NetportExpress_ip_address 7 Connectez-vous en tant que root. 8 Dans le menu principal telnet, choisissez l’option TCP/IP Configuration, tel que le masque de sous-réseau et l’adresse d’une passerelle, que vous souhaitez configurer et appuyez sur Entrée. 9 Définissez les paramètres pour chaque option que vous souhaitez configurer et appuyez sur Entrée. 10 Quittez l’écran telnet. 11 Testez la configuration de votre réseau et la connexion en tapant ping nom_d’hôte_NetportExpress Impression dans l’environnement AIX 4.1 1 Connectez-vous en tant que root puis tapez smit mkrque 2 Dans le champ Attachment Type, sélectionnez remote. 3 Tapez le champ de l’option que vous voulez configurer pour l’impression à distance. • Name of queue to add. Tapez le nom de la file d’impression locale. • HOSTNAME of remote server. Tapez le HOSTNAME du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez ajouté à la table d’hôte. • Name of QUEUE on remote server. Les noms de file d’attente corrects sont les suivants : LPT1_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT (pour port parallèle 1 ou la carte interne) LPT2_PASSTHRU ou LPT2_TEXT (pour port parallèle 2) COM1_PASSTHRU ou COM1_TEXT (pour le port série) Remarque : Utilisez PASSTHRU pour les fichiers PCL, PostScript ou les fichiers d’application et utilisez TEXT pour les fichiers texte AIX standard. • Type of print spooler on remote server. Cliquez sur list, puis sur BSD, protocole d’impression du serveur d’impression NetportExpress. 4 Cliquez sur OK, puis cliquez sur Done pour sauvegarder votre configuration. 5 Cliquez sur Cancel pour quitter smit. 6 Testez l’impression AIX avec le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. A partir de la station de travail, tapez 29 lpr -P file_d’impression_locale/etc/hosts oùfile_d’attente_d’impression_locale représente le nom défini dans le champ Name of queue to add. Impression dans l’environnement AIX 3.2.5 1 Lorsque vous êtes connecté en tant que root, tapez smit mkrque 2 Tapez un champ pour chaque option que vous souhaitez configurer afin de créer une file d’attente d’impression pour l’imprimante distante. • Name of queue to add. Tapez le nom de la file que vous souhaitez ajouter. • Activate the queue? Cliquez sur list, puis cliquez sur yes pour activer ou sur no pour désactiver la file d’attente. • Destination Host for remote jobs. Tapez le nom de l’hôte que vous avez ajouté à la table d’hôte. • Pathname of the Short Form Filter for queue status output. Cliquez sur list pour sélectionner le chemin d’accès du filtre de format court que vous souhaitez ajouter. • Pathname of the Long Form Filter for queue status output. Cliquez sur list pour sélectionner le chemin d’accès du filtre de format long que vous souhaitez ajouter. • Name of queue on remote printer. Les noms de file d’attente corrects sont les suivants : LPT1_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT, LPT2_PASSTHRU ou LPT2_TEXT, COM1_PASSTHRU ou COM1_TEXT Remarque : Utilisez PASSTHRU pour les fichiers PCL, PostScript ou les fichiers d’application et utilisez TEXT pour les fichiers texte UNIX standard. • Name of device to add. Tapez le nom de l’imprimante que vous souhaitez ajouter. • Backend Program pathname. Tapez /usr/lpd/rembak 3 Cliquez sur Do, puis appuyez sur la touche F12 pour quitter smit. 4 Testez l’impression AIX avec le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. A partir de la station de travail AIX, tapez lpr -P file_d’impression_locale /etc/hosts où file_d’impression_locale représente le nom défini dans le champ Name of queue to add. 30 Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress prend en charge plusieurs outils de gestion de réseau et d’imprimante. L’application Windows Netport Manager assure la configuration des serveurs d’impression de même que la production de rapports d’état et la gestion de tous les systèmes d’exploitation réseau gérés. Vous pouvez également accéder à telnet ainsi qu’à une interface Web, Web Netport Manager, contenant des outils supplémentaires de gestion du serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Une adresse IP doit être définie pour le serveur d’impression NetportExpress pour pouvoir accéder à ces services. Affichage de l’état Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression NetportExpress et cliquez sur le bouton Status. Modification de la vitesse du port parallèle Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Cliquez sur le bouton Properties et ensuite sur un onglet de port parallèle. Modification de la configuration Cliquez à droite d’un serveur d’impression NetportExpress et choisissez Configure print services du menu automatique. Restauration des paramètres d’origine par défaut d’un serveur d’impression NetportExpress Cliquez à droite du serveur d’impression NetportExpress et choisissez Factory Defaults dans le menu automatique. Mise à jour d’un serveur d’impression à l’aide de la technologie Flash Sélectionnez les serveurs d’impression NetportExpress que vous désirez mettre à jour. (Maintenez la touche de majuscules enfoncée pour en sélectionner plusieurs. Les serveurs sélectionnés doivent être dans le même segment réseau.) Cliquez sur le bouton Update. Modification des paramètres de communication (LIP pour NetWare, par exemple) Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression NetportExpress et choisissez communications dans le menu Options. Utilisation de Netport Manager Gestion du serveur d’impression NetportExpress 31 Accès à Web Netport Manager 1 Ouvrez votre explorateur Web. 2 Tapez l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans la boîte Location et appuyez sur Entrée. La page d’accueil de Web Netport Manager est alors affichée. Remarque : Pour savoir si le serveur d’impression NetportExpress utilise une adresse IP, imprimez une page d’essai en appuyant sur le bouton « diag » du serveur. Consultez la rubrique « Définition d’une adresse IP », pages 15 à 20, pour savoir comment définir ce type d’adresses. Utilisation de Web Netport Manager Vous pouvez également gérer vos serveurs d’impression en utilisant votre explorateur Web pour vous connecter au serveur Web relié au serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Pour exécuter Web Netport Manager, vous devez disposer de Netscape* ou de Microsoft Internet Explorer*, versions 3.0 ou plus récentes. Modification du mot de passe Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression NetportExpress et cliquez sur le bouton Properties. Cliquez sur l’onglet de mot de passe. Définition de l’adresse IP Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression et cliquez sur le bouton Configure. Sélectionnez TCP/IP. Si l’adresse IP n’est pas affichée, vous pouvez définir une adresse. Pour toute demande d’adresse IP, adressez-vous à votre administrateur de réseau. 32 Affichage du menu principal de telnet 1 A partir d’une station de travail utilisant TCP/IP, tapez telnet netport_ip_address où adresse_ip_netport correspond à l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression NetportExpress. 2 Connectez-vous en tant que root en utilisant le mot de passe que vous avez défini pour le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. 3 Choisissez la tâche que vous désirez exécuter à partir du menu principal. Support supplémentaire à la gestion Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress prend en charge les outils de gestion de réseau suivants : • Intel Device View for Web® 1.0 (www.intel.com/network) • Intel LANDesk® Management Suite • DMI* (Desktop Management Interface) • SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Consultez l’aide NetportExpress (NetportExpress Help) pour en savoir plus sur ces outils. Utilisation de telnet 33 La meilleure façon de résoudre un problème d’impression est d’aborder celuici de façon systématique et de savoir où obtenir de l’aide. Cette section énumère les principales causes des difficultés d’impression les plus courantes. Les ressources suivantes s’inscrivent en complément des pages qui suivent : • Module d’assistance Netport Manager Help (Netport Manager Help) • Module de dépannage (icône Troubleshooting de la fenêtre Netport Manager) • Module d’aide Web (sur CD-ROM) • Section « Support clientèle automatisé Intel » et support clientèle en ligne Intel (voir la page 43). Aucun voyant d’activité sur le serveur d’impression NetportExpress r Le serveur n’est pas alimenté. Veillez à ce qu’il soit relié à une source d’alimentation. r Les câbles ne sont pas correctement branchés dans les prises. Vérifiez les connexions. r Vous tentez d’utiliser PRO/100 sur un réseau 100 Mbits/s alors que le concentrateur ne prend pas en charge ce type de réseau. Vérifiez si le concentrateur utilisé convient. r Le câble réseau n’est pas connecté. Vérifiez la connexion. Le voyant d’activité est rouge et clignote sur le serveur d’impression Nombre de clignotements Origine 1- 4, 8 Panne de l’unité. Contactez votre fournisseur ou le support clientèle Intel. 5 Panne du port série. Déconnectez tous les périphériques du serveur d’impression. Déconnectez et reconnectez le câble d’alimentation du serveur d’impression. 6 Panne du port parallèle. Déconnectez tous les périphériques du serveur d’impression. Déconnectez et reconnectez le câble d’alimentation du serveur d’impression. 7 Panne de l’interface réseau. Remplacez le câble réseau ou connectez le serveur d’impression à un emplacement réseau différent. Problèmes relatifs au matériel du serveur d’impression Dépannage du serveur d’impression NetportExpress 34 Que signifie le voyant vert 10/100 ? r Ce voyant, situé au bout du périphérique PRO/100, devrait être éteint (OFF) sur les systèmes 10 Mbits/s et allumé (ON) sur les systèmes 100 Mbits/s. Comment faut-il régler les interrupteurs ? r Serveurs d’impression PRO,version pour réseaux en anneau à jeton seulement Vitesse du réseau Interrupteur 1 Interrupteur 2 Détection automatique de la vitesse Vers le haut (Up) Vers le haut (Up) Réglage à 4 Mbits/s Vers le bas (Down) Vers le bas (Down) Réglage à 16 Mbits/s Vers le bas (Down) Vers le haut (Up) r Serveurs d’impression Ethernet PRO et PRO/100 Ne s’applique pas. Les interrupteurs sont réservés pour usage ultérieur. Problèmes d’impression Impression impossible (commencez ici dans la plupart des cas) r La vitesse du port parallèle peut ne pas convenir. La vitesse de ce port doit être identique à celle de l’imprimante (voir le tableau ci-dessous). Vitesse du port parallèle Type d’imprimante utilisant cette vitesse Basse HP LaserJet 3* ou modèles antérieurs, imprimantes à matrice de points et imprimantes à jet d’encre Moyenne Valeur par défaut. HP LaserJet 4* ou l’équivalent et la plupart des autres imprimantes Elevée HP LaserJet 5si* (24 ppm) ou imprimantes plus rapides Logiciel A n’utiliser que si aucune autre vitesse ne convient. Réglage de la vitesse du port : • Sous Netport Manager, cliquez sur le bouton Properties. • Utilisez telnet pour accéder au menu principal telnet et choisissez Port Configuration. • A l’aide de l’explorateur Web, entrez l’adresse IP de votre serveur d’impression NetportExpress et choisissez ensuite Properties. r L’imprimante est éteinte ou n’est pas en ligne. Assurez-vous que l’imprimante fonctionne bien. Imprimez une page d’autovérification pour vous en assurer. r Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress n’est peut-être pas convenablement configuré. Vérifiez l’état (Status) sous Netport Manager. 35 r Le serveur n’est pas en ligne ou ne fonctionne pas. Vérifiez si les voyants du serveur d’impression NetportExpress sont bien allumés. Appuyez sur le bouton diag du périphérique pour imprimer une page d’essai afin de vérifier la configuration. r Le câble d’imprimante est trop long ou endommagé. Assurez-vous que ce câble ne dépasse pas 1,80 m de long. Si vous pensez que le problème se situe au niveau du câble, remplacez celui-ci avec un câble en bon état. Impression impossible sous AppleTalk r Le réseau est peut-être mal configuré. Assurez-vous que le Panneau de configuration est paramétré sur le réseau approprié (LocalTalk*, EtherTalk* ou TokenTalk*, selon le cas). Si EtherTalk est utilisé sur le réseau, assurez-vous qu’il s’agit d’EtherTalk Phase 2. Pour imprimer à l’aide de Phase 1, connectez le Macintosh au réseau à l’aide d’un routeur (Apple Internet Router* ou Liaison Internet Router*, par exemple) assurant le routage entre Phase 1 et Phase 2. r Vérifiez si le serveur d’impression NetportExpress est configuré pour l’impression AppleTalk. Vérifiez la configuration du serveur d’impression. r L’imprimante choisie ne correspond peut-être pas au type d’imprimante (Printer Type) spécifié sous Netport Manager. Vérifiez si le nom est exactement le même, y compris la casse (majuscules et minuscules) et les espaces. Impression impossible sous LAN Manager ou LAN Server r Des files d’attente peuvent avoir été créées sur un système n’utilisant ni LAN Manager, ni LAN Server. Vérifiez l’emplacement de chaque file d’attente. r Les files d’attente peuvent avoir été affectées au mauvais port. Assurez-vous que les files d’attente sont affectées au port LPT1, LPT2 ou LPT3 du système utilisant LAN Manager ou LAN Server. r Il est possible que les files d’attente soient mal configurées. Assurez-vous qu’un seul port LPT logique soit associé à un port LPT physique donné. Les files d’attente ne doivent pas toutes être affectées au port logique LPT1. Impression impossible sous UNIX r La commande tar, utilisée pour extraire les fichiers proinstall, a peut-être été utilisée de façon incorrecte. Consultez le manuel. r Les paramètres d’impression ne conviennent peut-être pas. La plupart des applications utilisent la commande PASSTHRU pour l’impression. Cette commande est utilisée par les langages d’impression PCL et PostScript. N’utilisez la commande TEXT que si vous imprimez un fichier texte UNIX. 36 r Le réseau n’est peut-être pas connecté au serveur d’impression. Utilisez la commande ping à partir d’une station de travail UNIX pour voir s’il existe une connectivité IP avec la tâche TCP/IP du serveur d’impression Netport. r Si vous utilisez proprint sur un hôte SCO, Solaris, UnixWare ou HP-UX, assurez-vous que le chemin d’accès complet vers proprint soit défini. Assurez-vous que le fichier lp_scrpt1 spécifie le chemin d’accès exact et complet vers l’utilitaire proprint. Veillez également à ce que le numéro de tâche soit spécifié. L’avant-dernière ligne du fichier lp_scrpt1 doit se lire comme suit : (commandes de l’interpréteur ...) | usr/intl/hupx/ proprint ‘basename $0’ job=1 exit $ ? r Si vous utilisez proprint, il est possible que le programme ne fonctionne pas. Assurez-vous en en imprimant une tâche à partir de la ligne de commande, sans utiliser le spouleur. r Si vous utilisez lpd sans proprint et l’impression binaire ou des fichiers PostScript, assurez-vous que le nom de file d’attente est le bon. Ce nom doit être LPT1_PASSTHRU pour les fichiers ASCII. Les files d’attente s’allongent, mais rien ne s’imprime r Un autre serveur dessert peut-être la file d’attente. Sélectionnez une autre file d’attente ou remplacez la file d’attente utilisée par l’autre serveur d’impression. r L’imprimante peut être hors ligne ou être réglée pour un type de port invalide (parallèle ou série). Vérifiez l’imprimante et les ports. r Le réseau n’est peut-être pas connecté. Vérifiez la connexion. Pouvez-vous imprimer une page d’essai? Si c’est le cas, vérifiez la connexion réseau entre la station de travail et le serveur d’impression. Vérifiez également la connexion au concentrateur ou au commutateur. r Si la tâche semble s’imprimer, mais que rien ne sort de l’imprimante, c’est peut- être qu’elle a été acheminée à une autre imprimante. r Il est possible que les paramètres du pilote soient erronés. Vous tentez peut-être d’envoyer une tâche PostScript à une imprimante de type autre que PostScript ou encore d’envoyer une tâche non PostScript à une imprimante PostScript. La tâche ne s’imprime pas correctement r Le pilote d’imprimante n’est peut-être pas le bon. Assurez-vous que le pilote qui convient soit utilisé. r Il est parfois nécessaire de régler l’imprimante en mode autodétection de travaux d’impression PostScript. r Une imprimante PostScript tente peut-être d’imprimer une tâche autre que PostScript. Vérifiez la tâche d’impression et l’imprimante. r Si vous copiez un fichier graphique (binaire) vers LPT1, vous utilisez peut-être un paramètre erroné. Le paramètre doit être /b : copy /b lpt1 où est le nom du fichier que vous désirez imprimer. 37 r Novell NetWare seulement. Le paramètre de page de titre peut être erroné. Insérez le paramètre NT (No Tabs ou pas de tabulation) dans la commande CAPTURE. Les caractères ne s’impriment pas correctement r AppleTalk seulement. Si l’imprimante n’imprime pas les polices correctement, vérifiez si le groupe de polices spécifié dans Netport Manager est le groupe approprié pour l’imprimante. Remarque : Ceci ne s’applique que dans le cas des imprimantes n’ayant aucune fonction d’impression bidirectionnelle. L’imprimante série ne fonctionne pas correctement r Les paramètres du port série ne correspondent peut-être pas à votre imprimante. Sous Netport Manager, ouvrez le menu Device Properties et vérifier la vitesse en bauds sous le port série, ainsi que le réglage de la parité, les bits d’arrêt, et ainsi de suite. Assurez-vous que ces réglages correspondent à votre imprimante. (Vous pouvez également effectuer cette vérification en entrant votre adresse IP dans l’explorateur Web pour accéder aux pages Web du serveur d’impression.) r Il est possible que le serveur d’impression NetportExpress ne soit plus sous tension ou qu’il soit débranché. Vérifiez, sur l’imprimante, si le voyant de saut de page ou d’activité est allumé. Réinitialisez l’imprimante pour vider les données non imprimables. Vous devrez peut-être réinitialiser le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. r Le câble est peut-être défectueux. Branchez le câble série à une station de travail et essayez d’imprimer. Si aucun fichier ne s’imprime à partir de cette station de travail, remplacez le câble. L’imprimante insère un espace entre les lignes r Le cas échéant, désactivez la fonction de retour automatique à la ligne. Si vous utilisez Netport Manager, sélectionnez le NetportExpress posant problème et cliquez sur Properties. Dans la fenêtre de paramétrage du port, désactivez la fonction de retour automatique à la ligne. Vous pouvez également utiliser l’explorateur Web ou telnet. Consultez la rubrique Gestion du serveur d’impression NetportExpress à la page 30. Il est impossible d’imprimer alors que l’impression fonctionnait auparavant r Si vous avez changé le nom Netport (Netport Name) ou le nom de partage (Share Name) de votre serveur d’impression NetportExpress après avoir configuré celui-ci, le nouveau nom n’apparaît peut-être plus dans la liste des serveurs d’impression et l’imprimante ne peut donc reconnaître votre serveur. Supprimez les configurations de port et réaffectez les serveurs d’impression et les files d’attente, selon le cas. 38 Problèmes liés à Netport Manager Netport Manager ne peut pas être lancé r Vérifiez la station de travail. Essayez d’exécuter Netport Manager à partir d’une autre station. r La configuration n’est peut-être pas terminée. Si vous venez de configurer ou de réinitialiser le serveur d’impression NetportExpress, attendez quelques secondes avant de cliquer sur l’icône de serveur d’impression dans la liste. Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress est absent ou son nom dans la liste est inexact r Il faut peut-être réinitialiser le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Débranchez le câble d’alimentation et rebranchez-le. Attendez environ 30 secondes et cliquez sur l’icône de serveur d’impression apparaissant dans la liste des serveurs d’impression. Si le serveur n’est toujours pas affiché, cliquez sur le menu View et ensuite sur Refresh. r Si le voyant d’activité clignote à une fréquence précise, c’est qu’il y a peut-être un problème au niveau du périphérique. Vérifiez la liste au début de la section Dépannage. Si vous pensez que le périphérique est défectueux, branchez le serveur d’impression à un autre branchement réseau pour voir s’il fonctionne à cet autre endroit. r Si vous avez changé le nom de partage (Share Name) ou le nom Netport (Netport Name) de votre serveur d’impression NetportExpress après avoir configuré celui-ci, il n’apparaît peut-être plus dans Netport Manager. Reconfigurez le serveur d’impression en spécifiant le(s) nouveau(x) nom(s). Un message est imprimé au lieu de la tâche r Si un message s’imprime au lieu de la tâche demandée, c’est que les communications bidirectionnelles activées pour l’imprimante ne sont pas prises en charge par cette dernière. Sous Netport Manager, allez à Properties, sélectionnez le port et désélectionnez l’option de communications bidirectionnelles. Le défilement de la liste des serveurs d’impression est lent r Il est possible que le réseau compte un grand nombre de serveurs d’impression. Vous pouvez améliorer la performance de Netport Manager en regroupant les serveurs d’impression. 39 Autres difficultés Impossible de partager les files d’impression dans LAN Manager r LAN Manager seulement. Si vous essayez d’utiliser la commande NET SHARE pour partager une file d’attente qui n’est pas encore affectée à l’imprimante appropriée, le message DOS suivant apparaît : The destination list provided does not match the destination list of the printer queue. Utilisez NET ADMIN pour contrôler et corriger les affectations imprimantes/ files. 1 A l’invite OS/2 plein écran, tapez : NET ADMIN 2 Cliquez sur le menu View et ensuite sur Shared Resources. 3 Dans la fenêtre Shared Resources, sélectionnez . 4 Choisissez l’option Printer et cliquez sur OK. 5 Dans la fenêtre Share a Printer Queue with the Network, sélectionnez la file voulue. Cliquez sur OK. 6 Affichez les informations des ressources partagées (Shared Resource Information) pour connaître les affectations files/imprimantes. Cliquez sur Done. 7 Attribuez aux utilisateurs et aux groupes des droits d’accès à la file d’impression. Sélectionnez l’utilisateur ou le groupe dépourvu de droits d’accès, puis sélectionnez Yes pour « accès autorisé ». Choisissez Permit pour ajouter cet utilisateur ou ce groupe à la liste des droits d’accès affectés (Assigned Permissions). Cliquez sur OK. 8 Quittez NET ADMIN. Oubli du mot de passe r Effectuez une mise à jour sérielle pour supprimer le mot de passe existant. Si le modèle de serveur d’impression NetportExpress ne comporte pas de port série, contactez le service de support clientèle Intel. 40 Limites de la garantie Intel garantit au propriétaire initial que le produit fourni dans cet emballage est exempt de vice de fabrication pièces et main-d’oeuvre pendant une période de trois (3) ans à compter de : (i) la date d’acquisition sous réserve d’enregistrement en renvoyant la carte d’enregistrement accompagnée d’une copie du justificatif d’achat; de (ii) la date de fabrication; ou de (iii) la date d’enregistrement effectué par voie électronique à condition que cet enregistrement intervienne dans un délai de 30 jours suivant l’achat. La garantie sera nulle si le produit est endommagé lors de l’installation. Intel vous recommande de confier l’installation de ce produit à votre revendeur. LA GARANTIE CI-DESSUS EXCLUT TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, DE QUELQUE NATURE ET A QUELQUE TITRE QUE CE SOIT, EXPLICITE, IMPLICITE OU REGLEMENTAIRE, ET NOTAMMENT DES GARANTIES DE COMMERCIALISATION OU D’UTILISATION A UNE FIN DETERMINEE AINSI QUE DES GARANTIES CONTRE LA VIOLATION DES DROITS DE PROPRIETE INTELLECTUELLE DE QUELQUE PARTIE QUE CE SOIT OU TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE EN RAPPORT AVEC UNE PROPOSITION, UNE SPECIFICATION OU UN ECHANTILLON. Cette garantie ne couvre pas le remplacement de produits endommagés à la suite d’abus, accident, mauvaise utilisation, négligence, modification, réparation, sinistre, installation incorrecte ou test inapproprié. Dans tous les autres cas de défectuosité, les obligations d’Intel se limiteront, à la discrétion d’Intel, au remplacement ou à la réparation du produit sans autres frais que ceux indiqués ci-dessous, à condition que le produit soit livré accompagné d’un numéro d’autorisation de retour de matériel (RMA) (voir ci-dessous) soit au revendeur soit directement à Intel. En cas d’expédition du produit, vous devez assumer le risque de dommage ou de perte encouru lors du transport. Vous devez utiliser l’emballage d’origine (ou équivalent) et prendre à votre charge les frais de transport. Intel peut réparer le produit ou le remplacer par un produit neuf ou reconditionné, et le produit retourné devient la propriété d’Intel. Intel garantit que le produit réparé ou remplacé est exempt de vice de fabrication pièces et main-d’oeuvre pendant : (i) une période de quatre-vingt-dix jours (90) suivant la date de réexpédition; ou (ii) la période de la garantie d’origine de trois (3) ans restant à courir, au cas où cette période serait plus longue. Cette garantie vous confère des droits juridiques spécifiques. Il se peut que vous disposiez d’autres droits, lesquels peuvent varier selon les juridictions. Tous les composants ou toutes les pièces contenues dans ce produit sont couverts par la garantie limitée d’Intel s’appliquant à ce produit. Le produit peut contenir des pièces entièrement testées et recyclées, garanties comme si elles étaient neuves. Retour d’un produit défectueux (RMA) Avant de retourner un produit défectueux, contactez un groupe de support clientèle Intel pour obtenir un numéro d’autorisation de retour de matériel (RMA) : Amérique du Nord seulement : (916) 377-7000 Ailleurs dans le monde : Retournez le produit au revendeur. Après s’être assuré que le produit est bien défectueux, le groupe de support clientèle demande au service d’autorisation des retours de matériel d’émettre un numéro RMA que vous devez inscrire à l’extérieur de l’emballage. Intel n’accepte pas les produits dont l’emballage ne porte aucun numéro RMA. Responsabilité limitée et recours EN AUCUNE CAS, INTEL NE POURRA ETRE TENUE RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES INDIRECTS OU SPECULATIFS (ET NOTAMMENT DES DOMMAGES INDIRECTS, DES DOMMAGES-INTERETS ACCESSOIRES ET DES DOMMAGES SPECIAUX RESULTANT DE L’UTILISATION OU DE L’IMPOSSIBILITE D’UTILISER LE PRODUIT, QUE CE SOIT EN RAPPORT AVEC LE CONTRAT, UNE NEGLIGENCE, UN TORT OU TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE OU PAR SUITE DE VIOLATION DES DROITS DE PROPRIETE INTELLECTUELLE DE QUELQUE PARTIE QUE CE SOIT, MEME SI INTEL A ETE 41 PREVENUE DE L’EVENTUALITE DE TELS DOMMAGES, ET NOTAMMENT PERTE D’EXPLOITATION, INTERRUPTIONS D’ACTIVITE ET PERTES FINANCIERES EN TOUT ETAT DE CAUSE, LA RESPONSABILITE D’INTEL EN VERTU DU PRESENT CONTRAT NE POURRA EN AUCUN CAS EXCEDER LE MONTANT EFFECTIVEMENT PAYE POUR L’ACQUISITION DU PRODUIT. CES LIMITES DE REPONSABILITES POTENTIELLES ONT ETE UN CRITERE CLE DANS LA DETERMINATION DU PRIX DU PRODUIT. A CE TITRE, INTEL N’ASSUME AUCUNE RESPONSABILITE ET N’AUTORISE PERSONNE A LE FAIRE EN SON NOM. Dans certains pays, la loi ne permet pas la limitation ou l’exclusion de la garantie pour les dommages-intérêts ou les dommages indirects. Par conséquent, les limitations ou exclusions susmentionnées ne s’appliquent pas nécessairement à vous. 5/28/97(kc) Notice FCC relative aux interférences radioélectriques Ce matériel a été testé et déclaré conforme aux limites imposées à un appareil numérique de classe A, conformément à l’alinéa 15 de la notice FCC relative aux interférences radioélectriques. Ces limites sont conçues pour assurer une protection raisonnable contre les interférences dangereuses dans une installation commerciale. Ce matériel produit, utilise et peut émettre une énergie à haute fréquence et, s’il n’est pas installé et utilisé conformément aux instructions, il peut provoquer des interférences nuisibles pour les radiocommunications. Il n’est toutefois pas garanti que ces interférences ne se produiront pas sur une installation particulière. S’il s’avère que cet équipement produit des interférences nuisibles sur une réception radio ou télévisuelle, ce qui peut être déterminé en mettant hors tension, puis de nouveau sous tension le matériel, il est conseillé d’essayer de corriger les interférences en prenant l’une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes : • Modifiez l’orientation de l’antenne de réception radio ou TV. • Dans la mesure du possible, augmentez la distance qui sépare le matériel concerné de l’antenne de réception. • Raccordez le matériel à une prise appartenant à un circuit différent de celui du récepteur. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre revendeur ou un technicien radio/TV expérimenté. REMARQUE Ce matériel est conforme à l’alinéa 15 de la notice FCC relative aux interférences électromagnétiques. Son exploitation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) Ce matériel ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences, et (2) ce matériel doit en outre supporter n’importe quelle interférence reçue, y compris les interférences susceptibles de perturber son fonctionnement. AVERTISSEMENT Toute modification n’ayant pas été expressément approuvée par Intel peut se traduire par l’annulation du droit d’exploitation de ce matériel dont jouit l’utilisateur. Normes CE Le présent serveur d’impression NetportExpress est conforme à la directive de l’UE, 89/ 336/EEC, et fait appel aux normes EMC EN55022 (Class A) et EN50082-1. Ce matériel répond également aux normes de sécurité EN60950. Ce matériel a été testé et déclaré conforme aux normes CISPR 22 Class A. 42 Canada Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur : « Appareils Numériques », NMB-003 édictée par le Ministre Canadien des Communications. This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled: “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Canadian Department of Communications. VCCI Class 1 (Japan) Intel Corporation, Mailstop JF3-406, 5200 NE Elam Young Parkway Hillsboro, Oregon 97124-6497 USA 43 Techniciens du support clientèle Intel Autres services fournis gratuitement : Vous pouvez consulter nos spécialistes en support technique sans aucun frais. Services accessibles dans le monde entier : Intel possède des centres de support technique dans le monde entier. Le personnel de la plupart de ces centres se compose de techniciens parlant les langues locales. Pour obtenir la liste des centres de support Intel, les numéros de téléphone et les heures d’ouverture, téléchargez le document numéro 9089 à partir d’un des services automatisés. Si vous n’avez pas accès aux services automatisés, contactez votre revendeur ou distributeur local. Ou appelez le +1-916-377-7000 de 07:00 à 17:00, du lundi au vendredi, heure du Pacifique - Etats-Unis. 03/31/97 Support clientèle automatisé Intel Vous pouvez accéder aux services du support automatisé d’Intel 24 heures sur 24, tous les jours et gratuitement. Ces services offrent les toutes dernières informations disponibles sur les produits Intel. Vous pouvez obtenir des instructions d’installation, des informations de dépannage et de nombreuses notes sur la compatibilité, ainsi que des informations plus générales sur les produits. Fichiers World Wide Web & Intel Bulletin Board d’aide Intel Internet FTP Service (BBS) Obtenez des Accédez à la page d’accueil Consultez le BBS informations Intel sur le Web ou modem (8-N-1, détaillées par téléchargez des informations jusqu’à d’Intel. l’affichage en ligne à l’aide d’un site anonyme Connexion par des fichiers FTP. 14,4 Kbps). README. Dépannage ✓ ✓ Mises à jour logicielles ✓ ✓ Notes d’installation ✓ ✓ Information sur les produits ✓ Mode d’accès : WWW Etats-Unis et Canada Généralités : 1-503-264-7999 www.intel.com/network/print Europe News : news://cs.intel.com +44-1793-432955 Support clientèle : Reste du monde http://support.intel.com +1-503-264-7999 FTP Hôte : download.intel.com /enduser_reseller Répertoire : /support 44 utilisation de ARP 15 Définition d’une adresse IP sous UNIX 20 Dépannage 33 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) 20 DMI (Desktop Management Interface) 32 Domaine 13, 14 E Etat affichabe avec Netport Manager 30 F Fenêtre principale de Netport Manager 7 Fichiers de journalisation pour proprint 21 Files d’attente attribution en mode serveur d’impression NDS de Novell ll 8 G Garantie, limites 40 Gestion de réseau outils supplémentaires 32 H HP-UX 19 utilisation de proprint 21 HTML accès à Web Netport Manager 31 I ID de périphérique 2, 3, 4 Impression avec LAN Manager ou LAN Server 16 d’une page d’essai 2, 3 impression impossible 34 partage sous LAN Manager ou LAN Server 17 problème de câblage 35 problèmes courants 34 utilisation de la commande CAPTURE avec Novell 8 utilisation de proprint 21 Impression dans l’environent Macintosh 18 Impression de LAN Manager/LAN Server 16 impression directe sous Windows 95 13 Impression directe sous Windows NT 3.51 14 Impression directe sous Windows NT 4.0 13 Impression FTP 19 Impression LPR pour Windows NT 15 impression lpr/lpd 21, 22, 23, 24 impression lpr/lpd dans l'environnement UNIX 19, 21, 22, 23, 24 impression partagée sous Windows 95 14 Impression partagée sous Windows NT 3.51 14 Impression réseau dans l’environment Microsoft 12 Imprimantes LaserJet Index A Adresse IP paramètres Netport Manager 31 paramètres UNIX 20 paramètres Windows NT 15 Adresse MAC. Voir Adresse réseau Adresse réseau 3, 20, 27 Aide support clientèle 42 AIX 27 impression dans l’environement AIX 28 impression dans l’environement AIX 3.2.5 29 Alimentation celle à utiliser 2, 3 AppleTalk dépannage pour problèmes d’impression 35, 37 AppleTalk Phase 1 35 Autodétection des débits de données 3 B BOOTP (protocole Boot) 20 C Câblage câble d’alimentation 2 Câbles Catégorie 3 ou 5 2, 3 parallèles 3 problèmes d'impression 35 Câbles Catégorie 3 ou 5 3 Cartes de serveurs d’impression internes insertion dans les imprimantes 4 installation du matériel 4 CD-ROM Logiciel de serveur d’impression NetportExpress 6 Chooser 18 Configuration modification à l’aide de Netport Manager 30 pour protocoles multiples 6 Connecteur DB-9 3, 4 Connecteur RJ-45 2, 3 pour carte de serveur d’impression PRO interne 4 Connecteurs cartes de serveurs d’impression internes 4 DB-9 3 RJ-45 3 RJ-45 et BNC, pour cartes Ethernet PRO internes 4 Contexte pour mode serveur d’impression NDS de Novell 8 D Débits de données réseaux en anneau à jeton 3 Définition d’une adresse avec Netport Manager 31 45 configuration du mode imprimante distante NDS 9 configuration pour services bindery 10 licences d’utilisateur 8 mode imprimante distante pour services bindery 11 NW Admin et PCONSOLE 8, 10 Types de trames 2, 3 O OS/2 impression avec LAN Manager 16 impression avec LAN Server 17 Outils de gestion d’imprimante 30 Outils de gestion Web 32 P Page d’essai (impression) 2, 3 Paramètres avancés de configuracion 30 Paramètres de configuration, advancés 30 Paramètres d’origine restauraation 30 Passerelle par défaut 20 PASSTHRU 24 PCONSOLE superflu pour configuration de Netport Manager 8 PERSERVER.NLM en mode imprimante distante NDS de Novell 9 Phase 1, AppleTalk 35 Phase 1 impression avec LocalTalk 18 Phase 2, EtherTalk 35 Problèmes d’impression 34 Problèmes d’impression (imprimante série) 37 problèmes d’impression AppleTalk 37 Produit, retour 40 proprint 19 fichiers de journalisation 21 systèmes pris en charge 21 Protocoles multiples configuration 6 Protocoles multiples, configuration 6 R RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol) 20 Réseau en anneau à jeton débits de données 3 position par défaut 5 Restauration des paramètres d’origine 30 Retour d’un produit défectueux 40 RJ-45 4 S SCO 19 utilisation de proprint 21 Serveur d’impression retour 40 Serveur d’impression NetportExpress installation du logiciel 6 installation des cartes de serveurs d’impression i 5 Imprimantes LaserWriter 18 Installation du logiciel AIX 6 UNIX 6 Installation du matériel instructions pour carte interne 5 Intel Device View pour Web 32 Interrupteurs 5 paramètres 34 paramètres appropriés 34 Interrupteurs, réseau en anneau à jeton position par défaut 2, 3, 5 L LANDesk Management Suite 32 Licences d’utilisateur (Novell) 8 LIP (paquet Internet) 8, 10 LocalTalk 18 lpr/lpd systèmes pris en charge 21 M Mémoire Flash mise à jour à l’aide de TFTP 26 Mémorie mise à niveau de la mémoire Flash à l’aide de TFTP 26 Microprogramme mise à niveau à l’aide de TFTP 2, 26 MIO (entrée/sortie modulaire) fentes de l’imprimante pour cartes de serveurs d’impression internes ression internes 5 Mises à jour de la mémoire Flash 30 Mode imprimante distante 11 configuration pour services bindery 11 NDS de Novell 9 Mode serveur d’impression NDS de Novell 8 Services bindery de Novell NetWare 10 Moniteur de port 12 Mot de passe modification 31 oubli 39 N NDS configuration pour mode serveur d’impression 8 NDS de Novell NetWare configuration pour mode serveur d’impression 8 Netport Manager utilisation de to manage printing 30 NetportExpress Port Monitor 12 Normes CE 41 Notice FCC relative aux interférences radioélectri 41 Novell NetWare 46 Serveur d’impression PRO, externe installation du matériel 3 Serveurs d’impression Serveur d’impression PRO externe - Installation du matériel atériel 3 Services bindery configuration du mode serveur d’impression 11 mode serveur d’impression 10 SMIT (System Management Interface Tool) 27 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol 32 Solaris 19 impression avec lpr/lpd 22 utilisation de proprint 21 Subnet mask 20 SunOS 19 impression avec lpr/lpd 24 utilisation de proprint 21 Support, clientèle 42 System V, Release 4 impression avec lpr/lpd 22 Systèmes fondés sur BSD impression avec lpr/lpd 24 T Telnet 32 réglage des paramètres de configuration 20 TEXT 24 TFTP mise à niveau de la mémoire flash 26 Types de trames Novell NetWare 2, 3 U UnixWare 19 impression avec lpr/lpd 22 utilisation de proprint 21 V Vitesse du port 30 paramétrage 34 Vitesse du port parallèle modification à l’aide de Netport Manager 30 Vitesse du réseau 10/100 Mbits/s 2 Voyant d’activité 2, 33 Voyant vert 34 Voyants vert 34 voyant d’activité 2 voyant rouge d’activité 33 W Web Netport Manager 31 définition 7 Windows 95 installation du logiciel 6 Windows for Workgroups direct printing 15 Windows for Workgroups printing 15 Windows NT installation du logiciel 6 Windows pour Workgroups imprimer directement 15 installation du logiciel 6 Z Zones 18 48 Installation du matériel Installation du logiciel Configuration de NDS de Novell NetWare Configuration bindery pour Novell NetWare Impression réseau dans l’environnement Microsoft Configuration de LAN Manager/LAN Server Configuration d’AppleTalk Configuration d’UNIX Configuration d’AIX Gestion du serveur d’impression NetportExpressMC Dépannage Limites de la garantie/Notice (conformité aux normes) Support clientèle Index *679940-001* 679940-001 Now you can be connected without being tied down – with Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN Adapters and Access Points. Fast and compatible with existing Ethernet technology, wireless LANs extend the reach and the usefulness of your wired network resources. From conference rooms, training centers and cafeterias, you are free to work, teach or study wherever you’re most productive. There’s no easier way to provide reliable, real-time LAN access away from the desk. Extend your network … or create a new one No network? No problem – the Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN Solution can serve as the basis for an entirely new network infrastructure, in which devices are instantly deployed or reconfigured without the costs and concerns of pulling wires throughout a building. Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN PC Cards also let you create ad hoc networks on-the-fly, sharing information in secure peer-to-peer sessions, allowing communication with only the people you authorize. Intel is the worldwide leader in Fast Ethernet networking connections1 , and also co-inventor of the Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet standards, so it shouldn’t be surprising that Intel is now providing the best Wireless Ethernet solutions. Intel has designed these new wireless LAN products to IEEE 802.11b High Rate specifications, protecting your investment in infrastructure and assuring you of cross-vendor interoperability. Fast 11Mbps connectivity based on ■ Interoperates with other 802.11b Wi-Fi*-approved products IEEE 802.11b High Rate standard ■ Backwards compatible with 802.11 Direct Sequence products (aka Wireless Ethernet) at 1 and 2Mbps ■ Dynamic rate scaling tunes performance to minimize interference ■ Automatic load balancing and preemptive roaming optimize each client’s connection to the LAN ■ Seamless bridging between separate Ethernet networks allows connectivity without cables Reliable and trusted net access – ■ 128-bit Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) protects information even when you’re not at your desk in transit by adding powerful encryption without a noticeable impact to performance ■ Bi-directional authentication restricts LAN access to recognized clients and Access Points via advanced security settings Brand name reliability ■ The quality, reliability and support that you would expect from the world leader in Fast Ethernet networking connections1 Simple to set up and manage ■ Plug ‘n’ Play adapter installation ■ Browser-based configuration and management with full support for SNMP v3 ■ Integrates into existing Ethernet networks • Supporting Features Benefits • Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN Solution Networks as mobile as the people who use them ■ Extend LAN connectivity without costly wiring ■ Deploy instant networks at any location KEY FEATURES • ■ Enables mobile roaming and building-wide coverage ■ Bridges wired and wireless networks ■ Eases installation and management KEY FEATURES • • Support for data and VoIP applications, wireless handsets – Enables converged H.323 voice and data networks that are truly mobile. Network-to-network bridging – Bridges between wired and wireless networks and can also connect two wired networks wirelessly. Secure access control with bi-directional authentication – Use MAC addresses and pre-defined network IDs to restrict which adapters and Access Points can connect to the network. Embedded web server – Configure, monitor and manage Access Points from anywhere in the world via standard web browser. Multi-purpose design – Mounts easily on walls and ceilings, rests discreetly on shelves and filing cabinets. • Private, trusted connections 128-bit Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) ■ Encrypts transmissions to help ensure privacy while maintaining speed and quality Bi-directional authentication ■ Restricts LAN access to recognized clients and Access Points via advanced security settings Standards-based design Compliant with IEEE 802.11b High Rate specification ■ Ensures interoperability with all other 802.11b High Rate compliant products Reliable performance Seamless bridging to, from and between ■ Innovative, cost-effective solution extends the reach of Ethernet networks wired networks to conference rooms, classrooms, training centers, etc. Wireless repeating ■ Extends network coverage to areas that don’t have network access Simple to set up and manage Advanced manageability ■ Allows firmware updates via FTP or a direct serial connection without taking the Access Point offline ■ Upgrade entire wireless network at one time from one remote location Embedded web server with full support for ■ Enables configuration and management with a browser from SNMP v3 anywhere in the world, so changes take just a few mouse clicks, not a personal visit Receives power through the Ethernet cable2 ■ Simplifies set-up and eliminates costly process of running electricity to each Access Point Comprehensive site survey tool ■ Makes it easy to optimize Access Point placement for best (included in every box) coverage and performance Features Benefits BNC-mounted 1dB gain diversity antennas – Provide reliable coverage for most indoor environments. Built-in BNC connectors also support a wide variety of optional specialty antennas. Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN Access Point The fastest & easiest way to enable network connectivity wherever you need it Whether you need to extend the reach of a wired network or quickly deploy an all wireless LAN, Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN Access Points provide a reliable, easy-to-install network infrastructure. Intel’s standards-based solution is ideal for historic buildings, leased office spaces, temporary projects … any location where wired connectivity is not practical or cost-effective. Uninterrupted connectivity Advanced roaming scheme ■ Operates continuously and automatically in the background, so that connection with a new Access Point is established before the old connection is lost Mobile IP ■ Seamless roaming across sub-nets without rebooting Location profiles ■ Enables travel between offices or between home and work without reconfiguring laptops to log onto a network International roaming ■ Automatically selects the correct spectrum range when used in multiple countries Easy to use and manage Task Tray indicators ■ Automatic updates keep users informed of signal strength and quality PRO/Wireless client utilities ■ Optimize power and performance levels, graph interference patterns, view transmission statistics DHCP support ■ Lets clients obtain a leased IP address from a DHCP server, eliminating the complexity of assigning fixed IP addresses in a large enterprise Robust management system ■ Configure and monitor from anywhere in the world via web browser Automatic performance optimizations Load balancing ■ Automatically switches among Access Points to optimize signal strength and quality, and minimize spectrum sharing Dynamic rate scaling ■ Always seeks to connect at 11Mbps, then switches (if network traffic demands) to 5.5, 2 or 1Mbps for increased signal range; automatically returns to higher speed when conditions allow Advanced power management ■ Extends laptop battery life to maximize time away from the desk Ad hoc mode ■ Allows direct peer-to-peer communication without using an Access Point – perfect for small networks or temporary project teams Features Benefits ■ Advanced hardware design provides secure, high-speed connectivity while roaming ■ Ad hoc mode enables simple peer-to-peer networks ■ Intelligent on-board power management extends laptop battery life KEY FEATURES DHCP – Supports the same dynamic IP address servers as wired networks. Location profiles – Allows hassle-free traveling among networks. Mobile IP – Enables roaming across sub-nets without rebooting. Integrated diversity antennas – Two integrated antennas overcome multi-path problems for the best possible connection. Automatic load balancing and preemptive roaming – Continuously monitors signal strength, signal quality and Access Point traffic and makes adjustments to optimize performance. • • • Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN PC Card Fast, reliable network connectivity – even when you’re not at your desk Unleash the productivity of your workforce with Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN PC Cards. With untethered instant-networking capabilities, users of laptops and other mobile devices can work where they’re most productive. Take your network with you Immediate access to critical information while you’re still in a conference room … real-time updates to your supply-chain system from the factory floor … ad hoc, peer-to-peer networking sessions wherever you happen to be … classroom computers and peripherals that communicate with each other and the Internet instantly and easily – the possibilities of wireless connectivity come to life with Intel PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN PC Cards. 0600/SG/JN/PP/OC/10K Please Recycle NP1690 Information in this document is provided in connection with Intel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document. Except as provided in Intel’s Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products, Intel assumes no liability whatsoever, and Intel disclaims any express or implied warranty, relating to sale and/or use of Intel products including liability or warranties relating to fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, or infringement of any patent, copyright or other intellectual property right. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life saving, or life sustaining applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. For the most current product information, please visit http://www.intel.com/network * Third-party trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. SPECIFICATIONS Intel® PRO/Wireless LAN PC Card NOTEBOOK SLOT TYPE Type II 16-bit PC card SOFTWARE DRIVERS Windows* 2000, 98, 95, NT*, Pocket PC and DOS; Linux*; Palm OS* DEVICE DRIVERS NDIS2, NDIS3, NDIS4, NDIS5 and ODI SOFTWARE UTILITIES Location profiles “My WLAN places”; Real-time signal strength/quality “NIC Utilities”; Diagnostic and Configuration “NIC Info”; Firmware upgrade “NIC Update”; Site Survey Tool NETWORK ARCHITECTURE Supports peer-to-peer networking and communication to TYPES wired networks via Access Points RANGE AT 1MBPS (TYPICAL) 1500ft (460m) open environment; 300ft (90m) office environment RANGE AT 11MBPS (TYPICAL) 400ft (120m) open environment; 100ft (30m) office environment ANTENNA Integrated internal diversity antenna LED INDICATORS Link status and link activity RECEIVE SENSITIVITY -87dBm @ 1Mbps; -85dBm @ 2Mbps; -84dBm @ 5.5Mbps -81dBm @ 11Mbps MAX OUTPUT POWER Typical 18dBm; Minimum 14dBm POWER CONSUMPTION Transmit: 300mA typical (500mA max.); Receive: 170mA typical (300mA max.); Sleep: 10mA typical (25mA max.) SAFETY COMPLIANCE USA/Canada: UL1950/CSA 22.2; Europe: CE Marked DIMENSIONS Length: 111mm/4.37in; Width: 54mm/2.23in; Thickness: 5mm/.20in; Weight: 1.6oz/45.36g SPECIFICATIONS Intel® PRO/Wireless LAN Access Point STANDARDS CONFORMANCE IEEE 802.11b High Rate, IEEE 802.3 (10BASE-T), 802.1H, 802.1d Spanning Tree, SNMP v2 LOCAL CONFIGURATION Direct console port (serial EIA-232 DB-9 male) REMOTE CONFIGURATION HTTP, Telnet, SNMP, PPP, tFTP, and Intel feature to perform bulk configuration to many APs AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION BOOTP and DHCP MAXIMUM CLIENTS 256 MANAGEMENT FEATURES Client Access Control via MAC address; Embedded HTTP Server SNMP traps; Multilevel passwords DIAGNOSTIC CAPABILITIES Event logging, data packet tracing, SNMP alarm generation, operating statistics; Protocol and bandwidth filters; Site Survey utility with signal strength logging ROAMING SUPPORT IEEE 802.11b High Rate compliant with Intel enhanced roaming features; Mobile IP PERFORMANCE Proxy ARP; Short preamble support; QoS Voice and ENHANCEMENTS Data Prioritization SECURITY 64- or 128-bit Encryption; Access Control List; MD5 Member Authentication (Mobile IP) RANGE AT 1MBPS (TYPICAL) 1500ft (460m) open environment; 300ft (90m) office environment RANGE AT 11MBPS (TYPICAL) 400ft (120m) open environment; 100ft (30m) office environment ANTENNA Two 2.2dBi dipole antennas with diversity support; also supports specialty antennas LED INDICATORS Status, network activity, and RF activity RECEIVE SENSITIVITY -87dBm @ 1Mbps; -85dBm @ 2Mbps; -84dBm @ 5.5Mbps; -81dBm @ 11Mbps MAX OUTPUT POWER Typical 18dBm; Minimum 14dBm POWER SUPPLY Input: 85 to 270V AC; Ouput: 12V DC POWER ENHANCEMENTS Power over Ethernet option2 (eliminates need for AC power at AP location) SAFETY COMPLIANCE USA/Canada: UL1950/CSA 22.2; Europe: CE Marked DIMENSIONS Length: 15.24cm/6in; Width: 21.59mm/8.5in; Height: 4.45cm/1.75in; Weight (w/ power supply): 1lbs./0.454kg HARDWARE SHIPPING Access Point, two dipole antennas, one power supply, one CONFIGURATION country-specific power supply cord (three in “EU” SKU), mounting brackets, clips and screws CUSTOMER SUPPORT Intel Customer Support Services offers a broad selection of programs. For more information, contact us on the World Wide Web at support.intel.com/sites/support. Service and availability may vary by country. ON-LINE DOCUMENTS To learn more about Intel ® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN Solutions, or to connect with an Intel® Premier Provider in your area, visit us at www.intel.com/network ORDER CODES Wireless PC Card, 2.4GHz, 11Mbps North America WPC2011NA Europe R&TTE countries, Australia WPC2011EU France WPC2011FR Japan WPC2011JP Wireless Enterprise Access Point, 2.4GHz, 11Mbps North America WEAP2011NA Europe R&TTE countries, Australia WEAP2011EU France WEAP2011FR Japan WEAP2011JP FOR PRODUCT INFORMATION World Wide Web www.intel.com/network U.S. and Canada 800-538-3373 UK +0870-6072439 France +01-41-918529 Germany +069-9509-6099 Italy +02-696-33276 Spain +91-377-8166 Finland +9-693-79297 Denmark +38-487077 Norway +23-1620-50 Sweden +08-445-1251 Holland +020-487-4562 Japan +81-298-47-0800 Hong Kong, Taiwan, Korea, Singapore and ASEAN +65-213-1000 Australia +61-2-9937-5800 SPECIFICATIONS Intel® PRO/Wireless LAN Product Suite DYNAMIC RATE SHIFTING 1, 2, 5.5, 11Mbps (Auto-selects highest usable rate) NETWORK STANDARD(S) IEEE 802.11b High Rate, 802.3, 802.1H, 802.1d Spanning Tree FREQUENCY 2.4GHz ISM band WIRELESS MEDIUM Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance (CSMA/CA) OPERATING SYSTEMS SUPPORTED Windows* 2000, 98, 95, NT*, and Pocket PC; Linux*; Palm OS* ENCRYPTION No encryption option; 64-bit WEP encryption option; 128-bit WEP encryption option MODULATION DBPSK @ 1Mbps; DQPSK @ 2Mbps; CCK @ 5.5 and 11Mbps OPERATING CHANNELS 11 channels (U.S. and Canada); 13 channels (ETSI compliant countries); 14 channels (Japan) ROAMING IEEE 802.11b High Rate compliant with Intel enhanced roaming features; Mobile IP with MD5 encryption for member authentication CERTIFICATION U.S./Canada: FCC Part 15 Class B US Unintentional Emissions; FCC Part 15.247, 15.205, 15.209 US Spread Spectrum; DOC RSS-210 Canadian Spread Spectrum; Europe: ETS 300 328, ETS 300 826, CE Marked; Japan: RCR STD-33; Contact us for other information outside the U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING RANGES Operating Temperature: -20° to 70°C; Storage Temperature: -30° to 80°C; Operating Altitude: up to 2.4km; Humidity: 95% maximum non-condensing Shock: 40G, 11mS, half sine; Vibration: 2G peak, sine; 0.02G peak random WARRANTY Three year: Access Points; Lifetime limited: Client Adapters 1 Dell’Oro Group, 1999 2 Requires optional accessory Document Number: 317804-010 Intel® Core™2 Duo Processor, Intel® Pentium® Dual Core Processor, and Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core Processor Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Supporting the: - Intel® Core™2 Duo Processor E6000 Δ and E4000 Δ Series - Intel® Pentium® Dual Core Processor E2000 Δ Series - Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core Processor E1000Δ Series December 2008 2 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines THIS DOCUMENT AND RELATED MATERIALS AND INFORMATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS, OR ANY WARRANTY OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF ANY PROPOSAL, SPECIFICATION, OR SAMPLE. INTEL ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY ERRORS CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT AND HAS NO LIABILITIES OR OBLIGATIONS FOR ANY DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life saving, life sustaining, critical control or safety systems, or in nuclear facility applications. Intel Corporation may have patents or pending patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights that relate to the presented subject matter. The furnishing of documents and other materials and information does not provide any license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any such patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Intel accepts no duty to update specifications or product descriptions with information. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked “reserved” or “undefined.” Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them. The hardware vendor remains solely responsible for the design, sale and functionality of its product, including any liability arising from product infringement or product warranty. Intel provides this information for customer’s convenience only. Use at your own risk. Intel accepts no liability for results if customer chooses at its discretion to implement these methods within its business operations. Intel makes no representations or warranties regarding the accuracy or completeness of the information provided. Copies of documents which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or other Intel literature, may be obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725, or by visiting http://www.intel.com . The Intel® Core™2 Duo processor, Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor and Intel® Pentium® 4 processor may contain design defects or errors known as errata, which may cause the product to deviate from published specifications. Current characterized errata are available on request. ∆ Intel processor numbers are not a measure of performance. Processor numbers differentiate features within each processor family, not across different processor families. Over time processor numbers will increment based on changes in clock, speed, cache, FSB, or other features, and increments are not intended to represent proportional or quantitative increases in any particular feature. Current roadmap processor number progression is not necessarily representative of future roadmaps. See www.intel.com/products/processor_number for details. Intel, Pentium, Core, and the Intel logo are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2007–2008 Intel Corporation Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 3 Contents 1 Introduction ...................................................................................................11 1.1 Document Goals and Scope ...................................................................11 1.1.1 Importance of Thermal Management ..........................................11 1.1.2 Document Goals......................................................................11 1.1.3 Document Scope .....................................................................12 1.2 References ..........................................................................................13 1.3 Definition of Terms ...............................................................................13 2 Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information .........................................................15 2.1 Mechanical Requirements ......................................................................15 2.1.1 Processor Package ...................................................................15 2.1.2 Heatsink Attach ......................................................................17 2.2 Thermal Requirements ..........................................................................18 2.2.1 Processor Case Temperature .....................................................18 2.2.2 Thermal Profile .......................................................................19 2.2.3 TCONTROL..................................................................................20 2.3 Heatsink Design Considerations ..............................................................21 2.3.1 Heatsink Size..........................................................................22 2.3.2 Heatsink Mass.........................................................................22 2.3.3 Package IHS Flatness...............................................................23 2.3.4 Thermal Interface Material........................................................23 2.4 System Thermal Solution Considerations .................................................24 2.4.1 Chassis Thermal Design Capabilities...........................................24 2.4.2 Improving Chassis Thermal Performance ....................................24 2.4.3 Summary ...............................................................................25 2.5 System Integration Considerations..........................................................25 3 Thermal Metrology ..........................................................................................27 3.1 Characterizing Cooling Performance Requirements ....................................27 3.1.1 Example ................................................................................28 3.2 Processor Thermal Solution Performance Assessment ................................29 3.3 Local Ambient Temperature Measurement Guidelines.................................29 3.4 Processor Case Temperature Measurement Guidelines ...............................32 4 Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature .....................................33 4.1 Processor Power Dissipation ...................................................................33 4.2 Thermal Monitor Implementation ............................................................33 4.2.1 PROCHOT# Signal ...................................................................34 4.2.2 Thermal Control Circuit ............................................................34 4.2.3 Thermal Monitor 2 ...................................................................35 4.2.4 Operation and Configuration .....................................................36 4.2.5 On-Demand Mode ...................................................................37 4.2.6 System Considerations.............................................................37 4.2.7 Operating System and Application Software Considerations ...........38 4.2.8 THERMTRIP# Signal.................................................................38 4.2.9 Cooling System Failure Warning ................................................38 4 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 4.2.10 Digital Thermal Sensor.............................................................38 4.2.11 Platform Environmental Control Interface (PECI)..........................39 5 Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information ........41 5.1 Overview of the Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Reference Design ......41 5.1.1 Target Heatsink Performance ....................................................41 5.1.2 Acoustics ...............................................................................42 5.1.3 Effective Fan Curve .................................................................44 5.1.4 Voltage Regulator Thermal Management .....................................45 5.1.5 Altitude..................................................................................46 5.1.6 Reference Heatsink Thermal Validation .......................................46 5.2 Environmental Reliability Testing ............................................................46 5.2.1 Structural Reliability Testing .....................................................46 5.2.2 Power Cycling .........................................................................49 5.2.3 Recommended BIOS/CPU/Memory Test Procedures ......................49 5.3 Material and Recycling Requirements ......................................................49 5.4 Safety Requirements ............................................................................50 5.5 Geometric Envelope for Intel Reference BTX Thermal Module Assembly ........50 5.6 Preload and TMA Stiffness .....................................................................51 5.6.1 Structural Design Strategy........................................................51 5.6.2 TMA Preload versus Stiffness ....................................................51 6 ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information.......................................................55 6.1 ATX Reference Design Requirements .......................................................55 6.2 Validation Results for Reference Design ...................................................58 6.2.1 Heatsink Performance ..............................................................58 6.2.2 Acoustics ...............................................................................59 6.2.3 Altitude..................................................................................60 6.2.4 Heatsink Thermal Validation .....................................................60 6.3 Environmental Reliability Testing ............................................................61 6.3.1 Structural Reliability Testing .....................................................61 6.3.2 Power Cycling .........................................................................63 6.3.3 Recommended BIOS/CPU/Memory Test Procedures ......................63 6.4 Material and Recycling Requirements ......................................................63 6.5 Safety Requirements ............................................................................64 6.6 Geometric Envelope for Intel Reference ATX Thermal Mechanical Design ......64 6.7 Reference Attach Mechanism..................................................................65 6.7.1 Structural Design Strategy........................................................65 6.7.2 Mechanical Interface to the Reference Attach Mechanism ..............66 7 Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) .....................................................69 7.1 Intel® QST Algorithm ............................................................................69 7.1.1 Output Weighting Matrix ..........................................................70 7.1.2 Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) ........................................70 7.2 Board and System Implementation of Intel® QST ......................................72 7.3 Intel® QST Configuration and Tuning.......................................................74 7.4 Fan Hub Thermistor and Intel® QST ........................................................74 Appendix A LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading ......................................................................75 A.1 LGA775 Socket Heatsink Considerations ..................................................75 A.2 Metric for Heatsink Preload for ATX/uATX Designs Non-Compliant with Intel® Reference Design .................................................................75 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 5 A.2.1 Heatsink Preload Requirement Limitations...................................75 A.2.2 Motherboard Deflection Metric Definition.....................................76 A.2.3 Board Deflection Limits ............................................................77 A.2.4 Board Deflection Metric Implementation Example.........................78 A.2.5 Additional Considerations .........................................................79 A.3 Heatsink Selection Guidelines.................................................................80 Appendix B Heatsink Clip Load Metrology ............................................................................81 B.1 Overview ............................................................................................81 B.2 Test Preparation...................................................................................81 B.2.1 Heatsink Preparation................................................................81 B.2.2 Typical Test Equipment ............................................................84 B.3 Test Procedure Examples.......................................................................84 B.3.1 Time-Zero, Room Temperature Preload Measurement ...................85 B.3.2 Preload Degradation under Bake Conditions ................................85 Appendix C Thermal Interface Management.........................................................................87 C.1 Bond Line Management .........................................................................87 C.2 Interface Material Area..........................................................................87 C.3 Interface Material Performance...............................................................87 Appendix D Case Temperature Reference Metrology..............................................................89 D.1 Objective and Scope .............................................................................89 D.2 Supporting Test Equipment....................................................................89 D.3 Thermal Calibration and Controls ............................................................91 D.4 IHS Groove .........................................................................................91 D.5 Thermocouple Attach Procedure .............................................................95 D.5.1 Thermocouple Conditioning and Preparation ................................95 D.5.2 Thermocouple Attachment to the IHS .........................................96 D.5.3 Solder Process ...................................................................... 101 D.5.4 Cleaning and Completion of Thermocouple Installation................ 105 D.6 Thermocouple Wire Management .......................................................... 108 Appendix E Legacy Fan Speed Control .............................................................................. 109 E.1 Thermal Solution Design ..................................................................... 109 E.1.1 Determine Thermistor Set Points ............................................. 109 E.1.2 Minimum Fan Speed Set Point ................................................. 110 E.2 Board and System Implementation ....................................................... 111 E.2.1 Choosing Fan Speed Control Settings ....................................... 111 E.3 Combining Thermistor and On-Die Thermal Sensor Control....................... 115 E.4 Interaction of Thermal Profile and TCONTROL ............................................. 115 Appendix F Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) System Thermal Considerations.................. 121 Appendix G Fan Performance for Reference Design ............................................................. 125 Appendix H Mechanical Drawings ..................................................................................... 128 Appendix I Intel Enabled Reference Solution Information.................................................... 146 6 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Figures Figure 2-1. Package IHS Load Areas ..................................................................15 Figure 2-2. Processor Case Temperature Measurement Location ............................19 Figure 2-3. Example Thermal Profile ..................................................................20 Figure 3-1. Processor Thermal Characterization Parameter Relationships.................28 Figure 3-2. Locations for Measuring Local Ambient Temperature, Active ATX Heatsink .......................................................................................31 Figure 3-3. Locations for Measuring Local Ambient Temperature, Passive Heatsink ...31 Figure 4-1. Thermal Monitor Control ..................................................................35 Figure 4-2. Thermal Monitor 2 Frequency and Voltage Ordering .............................36 Figure 4-3. TCONTROL for Digital Thermal Sensor................................................39 Figure 5-1. Effective TMA Fan Curves with Reference Extrusion..............................45 Figure 5-2. Random Vibration PSD ....................................................................47 Figure 5-3. Shock Acceleration Curve.................................................................48 Figure 5-4. Intel Type II TMA 65W Reference Design............................................50 Figure 5-5. Upward Board Deflection During Shock ..............................................51 Figure 5-6. Minimum Required Processor Preload to Thermal Module Assembly Stiffness .......................................................................................52 Figure 5-7. Thermal Module Attach Pointes and Duct-to-SRM Interface Features ......53 Figure 6-1. D60188-001Reference Design – Exploded View ...................................56 Figure 6-2. E18764-001 Reference Design – Exploded View ..................................57 Figure 6-3. Bottom View of Copper Core Applied by TC-1996 Grease ......................57 Figure 6-4. Random Vibration PSD ....................................................................61 Figure 6-5. Shock Acceleration Curve.................................................................62 Figure 6-6. Upward Board Deflection During Shock ..............................................65 Figure 6-7. Reference Clip/Heatsink Assembly.....................................................66 Figure 6-8. Critical Parameters for Interfacing to Reference Clip.............................67 Figure 6-9. Critical Core Dimension ...................................................................67 Figure 7-1. Intel® QST Overview .......................................................................70 Figure 7-2. PID Controller Fundamentals ............................................................71 Figure 7-3. Intel® QST Platform Requirements ....................................................72 Figure 7-4. Example Acoustic Fan Speed Control Implementation...........................73 Figure 7-5. Digital Thermal Sensor and Thermistor ..............................................74 Figure 7-6. Board Deflection Definition ...............................................................77 Figure 7-7. Example: Defining Heatsink Preload Meeting Board Deflection Limit .......79 Figure 7-8. Load Cell Installation in Machined Heatsink Base Pocket – Bottom View ..82 Figure 7-9. Load Cell Installation in Machined Heatsink Base Pocket – Side View ......83 Figure 7-10. Preload Test Configuration..............................................................83 Figure 7-11. Omega Thermocouple ....................................................................90 Figure 7-12. 775-LAND LGA Package Reference Groove Drawing at 6 o’clock Exit .....92 Figure 7-13. 775-LAND LGA Package Reference Groove Drawing at 3 o’clock Exit (Old Drawing) ..............................................................................93 Figure 7-14. IHS Groove at 6 o’clock Exit on the 775-LAND LGA Package ................94 Figure 7-15. IHS Groove at 6 o’clock Exit Orientation Relative to the LGA775 Socket ........................................................................................94 Figure 7-16. Inspection of Insulation on Thermocouple .........................................95 Figure 7-17. Bending the Tip of the Thermocouple ...............................................96 Figure 7-18. Securing Thermocouple Wires with Kapton* Tape Prior to Attach .........96 Figure 7-19. Thermocouple Bead Placement........................................................97 Figure 7-20. Position Bead on the Groove Step....................................................98 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 7 Figure 7-21. Detailed Thermocouple Bead Placement ...........................................98 Figure 7-22. Third Tape Installation ...................................................................98 Figure 7-23. Measuring Resistance Between Thermocouple and IHS .......................99 Figure 7-24. Applying Flux to the Thermocouple Bead ........................................ 100 Figure 7-25. Cutting Solder ............................................................................ 100 Figure 7-26. Positioning Solder on IHS ............................................................. 101 Figure 7-27. Solder Station Setup ................................................................... 102 Figure 7-28. View Through Lens at Solder Station.............................................. 103 Figure 7-29. Moving Solder back onto Thermocouple Bead .................................. 103 Figure 7-30. Removing Excess Solder .............................................................. 104 Figure 7-31. Thermocouple placed into groove .................................................. 105 Figure 7-32. Removing Excess Solder .............................................................. 105 Figure 7-33. Filling Groove with Adhesive ......................................................... 106 Figure 7-34. Application of Accelerant .............................................................. 106 Figure 7-35. Removing Excess Adhesive from IHS ............................................. 107 Figure 7-36. Finished Thermocouple Installation ................................................ 107 Figure 7-37. Thermocouple Wire Management................................................... 108 Figure 7-38. Thermistor Set Points .................................................................. 110 Figure 7-39. Example Fan Speed Control Implementation ................................... 111 Figure 7-40. Fan Speed Control....................................................................... 112 Figure 7-41. Temperature Range = 5 °C........................................................... 113 Figure 7-42. Temperature Range = 10 °C ......................................................... 114 Figure 7-43. On-Die Thermal Sensor and Thermistor .......................................... 115 Figure 7-44. FSC Definition Example................................................................ 117 Figure 7-45. System Airflow Illustration with System Monitor Point Area Identified . 122 Figure 7-46. Thermal sensor Location Illustration .............................................. 123 Figure 7-47. ATX/µATX Motherboard Keep-out Footprint Definition and Height Restrictions for Enabling Components - Sheet 1 .............................. 129 Figure 7-48. ATX/µATX Motherboard Keep-out Footprint Definition and Height Restrictions for Enabling Components - Sheet 2 .............................. 130 Figure 7-49. ATX/µATX Motherboard Keep-out Footprint Definition and Height Restrictions for Enabling Components - Sheet 3 .............................. 131 Figure 7-50. BTX Thermal Module Keep Out Volumetric – Sheet 1 ........................ 132 Figure 7-51. BTX Thermal Module Keep Out Volumetric – Sheet 2 ........................ 133 Figure 7-52. BTX Thermal Module Keep Out Volumetric – Sheet 3 ........................ 134 Figure 7-53. BTX Thermal Module Keep Out Volumetric – Sheet 4 ........................ 135 Figure 7-54. BTX Thermal Module Keep Out Volumetric – Sheet 5 ........................ 136 Figure 7-55. ATX Reference Clip – Sheet 1........................................................ 137 Figure 7-56. ATX Reference Clip - Sheet 2 ........................................................ 138 Figure 7-57. Reference Fastener - Sheet 1........................................................ 139 Figure 7-58. Reference Fastener - Sheet 2........................................................ 140 Figure 7-59. Reference Fastener - Sheet 3........................................................ 141 Figure 7-60. Reference Fastener - Sheet 4........................................................ 142 Figure 7-61. Intel® D60188-001 Reference Solution Assembly ............................. 143 Figure 7-62. Intel® D60188-001 Reference Solution Heatsink .............................. 144 Figure 7-63. Intel® E18764-001 Reference Solution Assembly ............................. 145 8 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Tables Table 2-1. Heatsink Inlet Temperature of Intel Reference Thermal Solutions............24 Table 2-2. Heatsink Inlet Temperature of Intel Boxed Processor Thermal Solutions ...24 Table 5-1. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Type II Reference TMA Performance ...................................................................................42 Table 5-2. Acoustic Targets ..............................................................................43 Table 5-3. VR Airflow Requirements...................................................................46 Table 5-4. Processor Preload Limits ...................................................................52 Table 6-1. D60188-001 Reference Heatsink Performance ......................................58 Table 6-2. E18764-001 Reference Heatsink Performance ......................................58 Table 6-3. Acoustic Results for ATX Reference Heatsink (D60188-001) ...................59 Table 6-4. Acoustic Results for ATX Reference Heatsink (E18764-001)....................59 Table 7-1. Board Deflection Configuration Definitions ...........................................76 Table 7-2. Typical Test Equipment .....................................................................84 Table 7-3. FSC Definitions .............................................................................. 116 Table 7-4. ATX FSC Settings ........................................................................... 118 Table 7-5. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Fan Speed Control Settings ......... 119 Table 7-6. Fan Electrical Performance Requirements .......................................... 125 Table 7-7. Intel® Representative Contact for Licensing Information of BTX Reference Design .......................................................................... 146 Table 7-8. D60188-001 Reference Thermal Solution Providers ............................. 146 Table 7-9. E18764-001 Reference Thermal Solution Providers ............................. 147 Table 7-10. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Reference Thermal Solution Providers .................................................................................... 148 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 9 Revision History Revision Number Description Revision Date -001 • Initial release. July 2007 -002 • Added Intel® Core™2 Duo Desktop processor E4400 at Tc-max of 73.3 °C. August 2007 -003 • Added Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2180 specifications August 2007 -004 • Added Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2160 and E2140 at Tcmax of 73.3 °C September 2007 -005 • Added Intel® Core™2 Duo Desktop processor E4600 October 2007 -006 • Added Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2200 specifications December 2007 -007 • Added Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core processor E1000Δ series • Updated reference design Intel P/N, supplier P/N and heatsink drawing • Updated Intel® Boxed Processor Thermal Solutions inlet ambient temperature assumption January 2008 -008 • Added Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2220 specifications • Added Intel® Core™2 Duo Desktop processor E4700 specifications March 2008 -009 • Added Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core processor E1400 April 2008 -010 • Added Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core processor E1500 December 2008 § 10 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Introduction Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 11 1 Introduction 1.1 Document Goals and Scope 1.1.1 Importance of Thermal Management The objective of thermal management is to ensure that the temperatures of all components in a system are maintained within their functional temperature range. Within this temperature range, a component is expected to meet its specified performance. Operation outside the functional temperature range can degrade system performance, cause logic errors or cause component and/or system damage. Temperatures exceeding the maximum operating limit of a component may result in irreversible changes in the operating characteristics of this component. In a system environment, the processor temperature is a function of both system and component thermal characteristics. The system level thermal constraints consist of the local ambient air temperature and airflow over the processor as well as the physical constraints at and above the processor. The processor temperature depends in particular on the component power dissipation, the processor package thermal characteristics, and the processor thermal solution. All of these parameters are affected by the continued push of technology to increase processor performance levels and packaging density (more transistors). As operating frequencies increase and packaging size decreases, the power density increases while the thermal solution space and airflow typically become more constrained or remains the same within the system. The result is an increased importance on system design to ensure that thermal design requirements are met for each component, including the processor, in the system. 1.1.2 Document Goals Depending on the type of system and the chassis characteristics, new system and component designs may be required to provide adequate cooling for the processor. The goal of this document is to provide an understanding of these thermal characteristics and discuss guidelines for meeting the thermal requirements imposed on single processor systems using the Intel® Core™2 Duo processor E6000 and E4000 series, Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series, and Intel® Celeron® DualCore processor E1000Δ series. The concepts given in this document are applicable to any system form factor. Specific examples used will be the Intel enabled reference solution for ATX/uATX systems. See the applicable BTX form factor reference documents to design a thermal solution for that form factor. Introduction 12 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 1.1.3 Document Scope This design guide supports the following processors: • Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C applies to Intel® Core™2 Duo processors E6700, E6600, E6420 and E6320 • Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 72.0 °C applies to Intel® Core™2 Duo processors E6850, E6750, E6550 and E6540 • Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache of Tc-max of 72.0 °C applies to Intel® Core™2 Duo processor E4700 • Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 61.4 °C applies to Intel® Core™2 Duo processor E6000 series of processors E6400 and E6300 and Intel® Core™2 Duo processor E4000 series of the processors E4400 and E4300 • Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C applies to the Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processors E2160 and E2140 • Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 73.3 °C applies to Intel® Core™2 Duo processors E6400, E4600, E4500, E4400, and E4300 • Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C applies to the Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processors E2220, E2200, E2180, E2160, and E2140 • Intel® Celeron® dual-core processor E1000 Series of Tc-max of 73.3 °C applies to the Intel® Celeron ® dual-core processor E1200, E1400, and E1500 In this document when a reference is made to “the processor” it is intended that this includes all the processors supported by this document. If needed for clarity, the specific processor will be listed. In this document, when a reference is made to the “the reference design” it is intended that this includes all ATX reference designs (D60188-001 and E18764-001) supported by this document. If needed for clarify, the specific reference design will be listed. In this document, when a reference is made to “the Datasheet”, the reader should refer to the Intel® Core™2 Extreme Processor X6800 and Intel® Core™2 Duo Desktop Processor E6000 and E4000 Sequences Datasheet, Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core Desktop Processor E2000 Series Datasheet, or Intel® Celeron ® Dual-Core Processor E1000 Series Datasheet. If needed for clarity, the specific processor datasheet will be referenced. Chapter 2 of this document discusses package thermal mechanical requirements to design a thermal solution for the processor in the context of personal computer applications. Chapter 3 discusses the thermal solution considerations and metrology recommendations to validate a processor thermal solution. Chapter 4 addresses the benefits of the processor’s integrated thermal management logic for thermal design. Chapter 5 gives information on the Intel reference thermal solution for the processor in BTX platform. Chapter 6 gives information on the Intel reference thermal solution for the processor in ATX platform. Chapter 7 discusses the implementation of acoustic fan speed control. The physical dimensions and thermal specifications of the processor that are used in this document are for illustration only. Refer to the datasheet for the product dimensions, thermal power dissipation and maximum case temperature. In case of conflict, the data in the datasheet supersedes any data in this document. Introduction Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 13 1.2 References Material and concepts available in the following documents may be beneficial when reading this document. Document Location Intel® Core™2 Extreme Processor X6800 and Intel® Core™2 Duo Desktop Processor E6000 and E4000 Series Datasheet http://intel.com /design/processor/datashts/3132 78.htm Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core Desktop Processor E2000 Series Datasheet www.intel.com//design/processor /datashts/316981.htm Intel® Celeron ® Dual-Core Processor E1000 Series Datasheet http://www.intel.com/design/proc essor/datashts/318924.htm LGA775 Socket Mechanical Design Guide http://intel.com/design/ Pentium4/guides/ 302666.htm uATX SFF Design Guidance http://www.formfactors.org/ Fan Specification for 4-wire PWM Controlled Fans http://www.formfactors.org/ ATX Thermal Design Suggestions http://www.formfactors.org/ microATX Thermal Design Suggestions http://www.formfactors.org/ Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) System Design Guide http://www.formfactors.org/ Thermally Advantaged Chassis version 1.1 http://www.intel.com/go/chassis/ 1.3 Definition of Terms Term Description TA The measured ambient temperature locally surrounding the processor. The ambient temperature should be measured just upstream of a passive heatsink or at the fan inlet for an active heatsink. TC The case temperature of the processor, measured at the geometric center of the topside of the IHS. TE The ambient air temperature external to a system chassis. This temperature is usually measured at the chassis air inlets. TS Heatsink temperature measured on the underside of the heatsink base, at a location corresponding to TC. TC-MAX The maximum case temperature as specified in a component specification. ΨCA Case-to-ambient thermal characterization parameter (psi). A measure of thermal solution performance using total package power. Defined as (TC – TA) / Total Package Power. Note: Heat source must be specified for Ψ measurements. Introduction 14 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Term Description ΨCS Case-to-sink thermal characterization parameter. A measure of thermal interface material performance using total package power. Defined as (TC – TS) / Total Package Power. Note: Heat source must be specified for Ψ measurements. ΨSA Sink-to-ambient thermal characterization parameter. A measure of heatsink thermal performance using total package power. Defined as (TS – TA) / Total Package Power. Note: Heat source must be specified for Ψ measurements. TIM Thermal Interface Material: The thermally conductive compound between the heatsink and the processor case. This material fills the air gaps and voids, and enhances the transfer of the heat from the processor case to the heatsink. PMAX The maximum power dissipated by a semiconductor component. TDP Thermal Design Power: a power dissipation target based on worst-case applications. Thermal solutions should be designed to dissipate the thermal design power. IHS Integrated Heat Spreader: a thermally conductive lid integrated into a processor package to improve heat transfer to a thermal solution through heat spreading. LGA775 Socket The surface mount socket designed to accept the processors in the 775–Land LGA package. ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface. Bypass Bypass is the area between a passive heatsink and any object that can act to form a duct. For this example, it can be expressed as a dimension away from the outside dimension of the fins to the nearest surface. Thermal Monitor A feature on the processor that attempts to keep the processor die temperature within factory specifications. TCC Thermal Control Circuit: Thermal Monitor uses the TCC to reduce die temperature by lowering effective processor frequency when the die temperature has exceeded its operating limits. TDIODE Temperature reported from the on-die thermal diode. FSC Fan Speed Control: Thermal solution that includes a variable fan speed which is driven by a PWM signal and uses the on-die thermal diode as a reference to change the duty cycle of the PWM signal. TCONTROL TCONTROL is the specification limit for use with the on-die thermal diode. PWM Pulse width modulation is a method of controlling a variable speed fan. The enabled 4 wire fans use the PWM duty cycle % from the fan speed controller to modulate the fan speed. Health Monitor Component Any standalone or integrated component that is capable of reading the processor temperature and providing the PWM signal to the 4 pin fan header. BTX Balanced Technology Extended. TMA Thermal Module Assembly. The heatsink, fan and duct assembly for the BTX thermal solution § Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 15 2 Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information 2.1 Mechanical Requirements 2.1.1 Processor Package The processors covered in the document are packaged in a 775-Land LGA package that interfaces with the motherboard via a LGA775 socket. Refer to the datasheet for detailed mechanical specifications. The processor connects to the motherboard through a land grid array (LGA) surface mount socket. The socket contains 775 contacts arrayed about a cavity in the center of the socket with solder balls for surface mounting to the motherboard. The socket is named LGA775 socket. A description of the socket is in the LGA775 Socket Mechanical Design Guide. The package includes an integrated heat spreader (IHS) that is shown in Figure 2-1 for illustration only. Refer to the processor datasheet for further information. In case of conflict, the package dimensions in the processor datasheet supersedes dimensions provided in this document. Figure 2-1. Package IHS Load Areas Top Surface of IHS to install a heatsink IHS Step to interface w ith LGA775 Socket Load Plate Substrate Top Surface of IHS to install a heatsink IHS Step to interface w ith LGA775 Socket Load Plate Substrate Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information 16 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines The primary function of the IHS is to transfer the non-uniform heat distribution from the die to the top of the IHS, out of which the heat flux is more uniform and spread over a larger surface area (not the entire IHS area). This allows more efficient heat transfer out of the package to an attached cooling device. The top surface of the IHS is designed to be the interface for contacting a heatsink. The IHS also features a step that interfaces with the LGA775 socket load plate, as described in LGA775 Socket Mechanical Design Guide. The load from the load plate is distributed across two sides of the package onto a step on each side of the IHS. It is then distributed by the package across all of the contacts. When correctly actuated, the top surface of the IHS is above the load plate allowing proper installation of a heatsink on the top surface of the IHS. After actuation of the socket load plate, the seating plane of the package is flush with the seating plane of the socket. Package movement during socket actuation is along the Z direction (perpendicular to substrate) only. Refer to the LGA775 Socket Mechanical Design Guide for further information about the LGA775 socket. The processor package has mechanical load limits that are specified in the processor datasheet. The specified maximum static and dynamic load limits should not be exceeded during their respective stress conditions. These include heatsink installation, removal, mechanical stress testing, and standard shipping conditions. • When a compressive static load is necessary to ensure thermal performance of the thermal interface material between the heatsink base and the IHS, it should not exceed the corresponding specification given in the processor datasheet. • When a compressive static load is necessary to ensure mechanical performance, it should remain in the minimum/maximum range specified in the processor datasheet • The heatsink mass can also generate additional dynamic compressive load to the package during a mechanical shock event. Amplification factors due to the impact force during shock must be taken into account in dynamic load calculations. The total combination of dynamic and static compressive load should not exceed the processor datasheet compressive dynamic load specification during a vertical shock. For example, with a 0.550 kg [1.2 lb] heatsink, an acceleration of 50G during an 11 ms trapezoidal shock with an amplification factor of 2 results in approximately a 539 N [117 lbf] dynamic load on the processor package. If a 178 N [40 lbf] static load is also applied on the heatsink for thermal performance of the thermal interface material the processor package could see up to a 717 N [156 lbf]. The calculation for the thermal solution of interest should be compared to the processor datasheet specification. No portion of the substrate should be used as a load- bearing surface. Finally, the processor datasheet provides package handling guidelines in terms of maximum recommended shear, tensile and torque loads for the processor IHS relative to a fixed substrate. These recommendations should be followed in particular for heatsink removal operations. Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 17 2.1.2 Heatsink Attach 2.1.2.1 General Guidelines There are no features on the LGA775 socket to directly attach a heatsink: a mechanism must be designed to attach the heatsink directly to the motherboard. In addition to holding the heatsink in place on top of the IHS, this mechanism plays a significant role in the robustness of the system in which it is implemented, in particular: • Ensuring thermal performance of the thermal interface material (TIM) applied between the IHS and the heatsink. TIMs based on phase change materials are very sensitive to applied pressure: the higher the pressure, the better the initial performance. TIMs such as thermal greases are not as sensitive to applied pressure. Designs should consider a possible decrease in applied pressure over time due to potential structural relaxation in retention components. • Ensuring system electrical, thermal, and structural integrity under shock and vibration events. The mechanical requirements of the heatsink attach mechanism depend on the mass of the heatsink and the level of shock and vibration that the system must support. The overall structural design of the motherboard and the system have to be considered when designing the heatsink attach mechanism. Their design should provide a means for protecting LGA775 socket solder joints. One of the strategies for mechanical protection of the socket is to use a preload and high stiffness clip. This strategy is implemented by the reference design and described in Section 6.7. Note: Package pull-out during mechanical shock and vibration is constrained by the LGA775 socket load plate (refer to the LGA775 Socket Mechanical Design Guide for further information). 2.1.2.2 Heatsink Clip Load Requirement The attach mechanism for the heatsink developed to support the processor should create a static preload on the package between 18 lbf and 70 lbf throughout the life of the product for designs compliant with the reference design assumptions: • 72 mm x 72 mm mounting hole span for ATX (refer to Figure 7-47). • TMA preload vs. stiffness for BTX within the limits shown on Figure 5-6. • And no board stiffening device (backing plate, chassis attach, etc.). The minimum load is required to protect against fatigue failure of socket solder joint in temperature cycling. It is important to take into account potential load degradation from creep over time when designing the clip and fastener to the required minimum load. This means that, depending on clip stiffness, the initial preload at beginning of life of the product may be significantly higher than the minimum preload that must be met throughout the life of the product. For additional guidelines on mechanical design, in particular on designs departing from the reference design assumptions refer to Appendix A. For clip load metrology guidelines, refer to Appendix B. Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information 18 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 2.1.2.3 Additional Guidelines In addition to the general guidelines given above, the heatsink attach mechanism for the processor should be designed to the following guidelines: • Holds the heatsink in place under mechanical shock and vibration events and applies force to the heatsink base to maintain desired pressure on the thermal interface material. Note that the load applied by the heatsink attach mechanism must comply with the package specifications described in the processor datasheet. One of the key design parameters is the height of the top surface of the processor IHS above the motherboard. The IHS height from the top of board is expected to vary from 7.517 mm to 8.167 mm. This data is provided for information only, and should be derived from: ⎯ The height of the socket seating plane above the motherboard after reflow, given in the LGA775 Socket Mechanical Design Guide with its tolerances. ⎯ The height of the package, from the package seating plane to the top of the IHS, and accounting for its nominal variation and tolerances that are given in the corresponding processor datasheet. • Engages easily, and if possible, without the use of special tools. In general, the heatsink is assumed to be installed after the motherboard has been installed into the chassis. • Minimizes contact with the motherboard surface during installation and actuation to avoid scratching the motherboard. 2.2 Thermal Requirements Refer to the datasheet for the processor thermal specifications. The majority of processor power is dissipated through the IHS. There are no additional components, e.g., BSRAMs, which generate heat on this package. The amount of power that can be dissipated as heat through the processor package substrate and into the socket is usually minimal. The thermal limits for the processor are the Thermal Profile and TCONTROL. The Thermal Profile defines the maximum case temperature as a function of power being dissipated. TCONTROL is a specification used in conjunction with the temperature reported by the digital thermal sensor and a fan speed control method. Designing to these specifications allows optimization of thermal designs for processor performance and acoustic noise reduction. 2.2.1 Processor Case Temperature For the processor, the case temperature is defined as the temperature measured at the geometric center of the package on the surface of the IHS. For illustration, Figure 2-2 shows the measurement location for a 37.5 mm x 37.5 mm [1.474 in x 1.474 in] 775-Land LGA processor package with a 28.7 mm x 28.7 mm [1.13 in x 1.13 in] IHS top surface. Techniques for measuring the case temperature are detailed in Section 3.4. Note: In case of conflict, the package dimensions in the processor datasheet supersedes dimensions provided in this document. Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 19 Figure 2-2. Processor Case Temperature Measurement Location 37.5 mm Measure TC at this point (geometric center of the package) 37.5 mm 37.5 mm Measure TC at this point (geometric center of the package) 37.5 mm 2.2.2 Thermal Profile The Thermal Profile defines the maximum case temperature as a function of processor power dissipation. The TDP and Maximum Case Temperature are defined as the maximum values of the thermal profile. By design the thermal solutions must meet the thermal profile for all system operating conditions and processor power levels. Refer to the processor datasheet for further information. While the thermal profile provides flexibility for ATX /BTX thermal design based on its intended target thermal environment, thermal solutions that are intended to function in a multitude of systems and environments need to be designed for the worst-case thermal environment. The majority of ATX /BTX platforms are targeted to function in an environment that will have up to a 35 °C ambient temperature external to the system. Note: For ATX platforms, an active air-cooled design, assumed be used in ATX Chassis, with a fan installed at the top of the heatsink equivalent to the reference design (see Chapter 6) should be designed to manage the processor TDP at an inlet temperature of 35 °C + 5 °C = 40 °C. For BTX platforms, a front-to-back cooling design equivalent to Intel BTX TMA Type II reference design (see the Chapter 5) should be designed to manage the processor TDP at an inlet temperature of 35 °C + 0.5 °C = 35.5 °C. The slope of the thermal profile was established assuming a generational improvement in thermal solution performance of the reference design. For an example of Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C in ATX platform, its improvement is about 16% over the Intel reference design (D60188- 001). This performance is expressed as the slope on the thermal profile and can be thought of as the thermal resistance of the heatsink attached to the processor, ΨCA (Refer to Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information 20 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Section 3.1). The intercept on the thermal profile assumes a maximum ambient operating condition that is consistent with the available chassis solutions. To determine compliance to the thermal profile, a measurement of the actual processor power dissipation is required. The measured power is plotted on the Thermal Profile to determine the maximum case temperature. Using the example in Figure 2-3 for the Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C dissipating 50 W, the maximum case temperature is 56.2 °C. See the datasheet for the thermal profile. Figure 2-3. Example Thermal Profile 2.2.3 TCONTROL TCONTROL defines the maximum operating temperature for the digital thermal sensor when the thermal solution fan speed is being controlled by the digital thermal sensor. The TCONTROL parameter defines a very specific processor operating region where fan speed can be reduced. This allows the system integrator a method to reduce the acoustic noise of the processor cooling solution, while maintaining compliance to the processor thermal specification. Note: The TCONTROL value for the processor is relative to the Thermal Control Circuit (TCC) activation set point which will be seen as 0 via the digital thermal sensor. As a result the TCONTROL value will always be a negative number. See Chapter 4 for the discussion the thermal management logic and features and Chapter 7 on Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST). The value of TCONTROL is driven by a number of factors. One of the most significant of these is the processor idle power. As a result a processor with a high (closer to 0 ) Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 21 TCONTROL will dissipate more power than a part with lower value (farther from 0, e.g., more negative number) of TCONTROL when running the same application. This is achieved in part by using the ΨCA vs. RPM and RPM vs. Acoustics (dBA) performance curves from the Intel enabled thermal solution. A thermal solution designed to meet the thermal profile would be expected to provide similar acoustic performance of different parts with potentially different TCONTROL values. The value for TCONTROL is calculated by the system BIOS based on values read from a factory configured processor register. The result can be used to program a fan speed control component. See the appropriate processor datasheet for further details on reading the register and calculating TCONTROL. See Chapter 7, Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST), for details on implementing a design using TCONTROL and the Thermal Profile. 2.3 Heatsink Design Considerations To remove the heat from the processor, three basic parameters should be considered: • The area of the surface on which the heat transfer takes place. Without any enhancements, this is the surface of the processor package IHS. One method used to improve thermal performance is by attaching a heatsink to the IHS. A heatsink can increase the effective heat transfer surface area by conducting heat out of the IHS and into the surrounding air through fins attached to the heatsink base. • The conduction path from the heat source to the heatsink fins. Providing a direct conduction path from the heat source to the heatsink fins and selecting materials with higher thermal conductivity typically improves heatsink performance. The length, thickness, and conductivity of the conduction path from the heat source to the fins directly impact the thermal performance of the heatsink. In particular, the quality of the contact between the package IHS and the heatsink base has a higher impact on the overall thermal solution performance as processor cooling requirements become stricter. Thermal interface material (TIM) is used to fill in the gap between the IHS and the bottom surface of the heatsink, and thereby improve the overall performance of the stack-up (IHS-TIMHeatsink). With extremely poor heatsink interface flatness or roughness, TIM may not adequately fill the gap. The TIM thermal performance depends on its thermal conductivity as well as the pressure applied to it. Refer to Section 2.3.4 and Appendix C for further information on TIM and on bond line management between the IHS and the heatsink base. • The heat transfer conditions on the surface on which heat transfer takes place. Convective heat transfer occurs between the airflow and the surface exposed to the flow. It is characterized by the local ambient temperature of the air, TA, and the local air velocity over the surface. The higher the air velocity over the surface, and the cooler the air, the more efficient is the resulting cooling. The nature of the airflow can also enhance heat transfer via convection. Turbulent flow can provide improvement over laminar flow. In the case of a heatsink, the surface exposed to the flow includes in particular the fin faces and the heatsink base. Active heatsinks typically incorporate a fan that helps manage the airflow through the heatsink. Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information 22 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Passive heatsink solutions require in-depth knowledge of the airflow in the chassis. Typically, passive heatsinks see lower air speed. These heatsinks are therefore typically larger (and heavier) than active heatsinks due to the increase in fin surface required to meet a required performance. As the heatsink fin density (the number of fins in a given cross-section) increases, the resistance to the airflow increases: it is more likely that the air travels around the heatsink instead of through it, unless air bypass is carefully managed. Using air-ducting techniques to manage bypass area can be an effective method for controlling airflow through the heatsink. 2.3.1 Heatsink Size The size of the heatsink is dictated by height restrictions for installation in a system and by the real estate available on the motherboard and other considerations for component height and placement in the area potentially impacted by the processor heatsink. The height of the heatsink must comply with the requirements and recommendations published for the motherboard form factor of interest. Designing a heatsink to the recommendations may preclude using it in system adhering strictly to the form factor requirements, while still in compliance with the form factor documentation. For the ATX/microATX form factor, it is recommended to use: • The ATX motherboard keep-out footprint definition and height restrictions for enabling components, defined for the platforms designed with the LGA775 socket in Appendix H of this design guide. • The motherboard primary side height constraints defined in the ATX Specification V2.1 and the microATX Motherboard Interface Specification V1.1 found at http://www.formfactors.org/. The resulting space available above the motherboard is generally not entirely available for the heatsink. The target height of the heatsink must take into account airflow considerations (for fan performance for example) as well as other design considerations (air duct, etc.). For BTX form factor, it is recommended to use: • The BTX motherboard keep-out footprint definitions and height restrictions for enabling components for platforms designed with the LGA77 socket in Appendix H of this design guide. • An overview of other BTX system considerations for thermal solutions can be obtained in the latest version of the Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) System Design Guide found at http://www.formfactors.org/. 2.3.2 Heatsink Mass With the need to push air cooling to better performance, heatsink solutions tend to grow larger (increase in fin surface) resulting in increased mass. The insertion of highly thermally conductive materials like copper to increase heatsink thermal conduction performance results in even heavier solutions. As mentioned in Section 2.1, the heatsink mass must take into consideration the package and socket load limits, the heatsink attach mechanical capabilities, and the mechanical shock and vibration profile targets. Beyond a certain heatsink mass, the cost of developing and implementing a heatsink attach mechanism that can ensure the system integrity under the mechanical shock and vibration profile targets may become prohibitive. Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 23 The recommended maximum heatsink mass for the ATX thermal solution is 550g. This mass includes the fan and the heatsink only. The attach mechanism (clip, fasteners, etc.) are not included. The mass limit for BTX heatsinks that use Intel reference design structural ingredients is 900 grams. The BTX structural reference component strategy and design is reviewed in depth in the latest version of the Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) System Design Guide. Note: The 550g mass limit for ATX solutions is based on the capabilities of the reference design components that retain the heatsink to the board and apply the necessary preload. Any reuse of the clip and fastener in derivative designs should not exceed 550g. ATX Designs that have a mass of greater than 550g should analyze the preload as discussed in Appendix A and retention limits of the fastener. Note: The chipset components on the board are affected by processor heatsink mass. Exceeding these limits may require the evaluation of the chipset for shock and vibration. 2.3.3 Package IHS Flatness The package IHS flatness for the product is specified in the datasheet and can be used as a baseline to predict heatsink performance during the design phase. Intel recommends testing and validating heatsink performance in full mechanical enabling configuration to capture any impact of IHS flatness change due to combined socket and heatsink loading. While socket loading alone may increase the IHS warpage, the heatsink preload redistributes the load on the package and improves the resulting IHS flatness in the enabled state. 2.3.4 Thermal Interface Material Thermal interface material application between the processor IHS and the heatsink base is generally required to improve thermal conduction from the IHS to the heatsink. Many thermal interface materials can be pre-applied to the heatsink base prior to shipment from the heatsink supplier and allow direct heatsink attach, without the need for a separate thermal interface material dispense or attach process in the final assembly factory. All thermal interface materials should be sized and positioned on the heatsink base in a way that ensures the entire processor IHS area is covered. It is important to compensate for heatsink-to-processor attach positional alignment when selecting the proper thermal interface material size. When pre-applied material is used, it is recommended to have a protective application tape over it. This tape must be removed prior to heatsink installation. Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information 24 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 2.4 System Thermal Solution Considerations 2.4.1 Chassis Thermal Design Capabilities The Intel reference thermal solutions and Intel Boxed Processor thermal solutions assume that the chassis delivers a maximum TA at the inlet of the processor fan heatsink. The following tables show the TA requirements for the reference solutions and Intel Boxed Processor thermal solutions. Table 2-1. Heatsink Inlet Temperature of Intel Reference Thermal Solutions ATX D60188- 001 ATX E18764-001 BTX Type II Heatsink Inlet Temperature 40 °C 40 °C 35.5 °C NOTE: 1. Intel reference designs (D60188-001 and E18764-001) are assumed be used in the chassis where expected the temperature rise is 5 °C. Table 2-2. Heatsink Inlet Temperature of Intel Boxed Processor Thermal Solutions Boxed Processor for Intel® Core™2 Duo Processor E6000 and E4000 Series, Intel® Pentium® Dual Core Processor E2000 Series, and Intel® Celeron® DualCore Processor E1000 Series Heatsink Inlet Temperature 40 °C NOTE: 1. Boxed Processor thermal solutions for ATX assume the use of the thermally advantaged chassis (refer to Thermally Advantaged Chassis version 1.1 for Thermally Advantaged Chassis thermal and mechanical requirements). 2.4.2 Improving Chassis Thermal Performance The heat generated by components within the chassis must be removed to provide an adequate operating environment for both the processor and other system components. Moving air through the chassis brings in air from the external ambient environment and transports the heat generated by the processor and other system components out of the system. The number, size and relative position of fans and vents determine the chassis thermal performance, and the resulting ambient temperature around the processor. The size and type (passive or active) of the thermal solution and the amount of system airflow can be traded off against each other to meet specific system design constraints. Additional constraints are board layout, spacing, component placement, acoustic requirements and structural considerations that limit the thermal solution size. For more information, refer to the Performance ATX Desktop System Thermal Design Suggestions or Performance microATX Desktop System Thermal Design Suggestions or Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) System Design Guide documents available on the http://www.formfactors.org/ web site. Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 25 In addition to passive heatsinks, fan heatsinks and system fans are other solutions that exist for cooling integrated circuit devices. For example, ducted blowers, heat pipes and liquid cooling are all capable of dissipating additional heat. Due to their varying attributes, each of these solutions may be appropriate for a particular system implementation. To develop a reliable, cost-effective thermal solution, thermal characterization and simulation should be carried out at the entire system level, accounting for the thermal requirements of each component. In addition, acoustic noise constraints may limit the size, number, placement, and types of fans that can be used in a particular design. To ease the burden on thermal solutions, the Thermal Monitor feature and associated logic have been integrated into the silicon of the processor. By taking advantage of the Thermal Monitor feature, system designers may reduce thermal solution cost by designing to TDP instead of maximum power. Thermal Monitor attempts to protect the processor during sustained workload above TDP. Implementation options and recommendations are described in Chapter 4. 2.4.3 Summary In summary, considerations in heatsink design include: • The local ambient temperature TA at the heatsink, which is a function of chassis design. • The thermal design power (TDP) of the processor, and the corresponding maximum TC as calculated from the thermal profile. These parameters are usually combined in a single lump cooling performance parameter, ΨCA (case to air thermal characterization parameter). More information on the definition and the use of ΨCA is given Sections 3.1. • Heatsink interface to IHS surface characteristics, including flatness and roughness. • The performance of the thermal interface material used between the heatsink and the IHS. • The required heatsink clip static load, between 18 lbf to 70 lbf throughout the life of the product (Refer to Section 2.1.2.2 for further information). • Surface area of the heatsink. • Heatsink material and technology. • Volume of airflow over the heatsink surface area. • Development of airflow entering and within the heatsink area. • Physical volumetric constraints placed by the system 2.5 System Integration Considerations Manufacturing with Intel® Components using 775–Land LGA Package and LGA775 Socket documentation provides Best Known Methods for all aspects LGA775 socket based platforms and systems manufacturing. Of particular interest for package and heatsink installation and removal is the System Assembly module. A video covering system integration is also available. Contact your Intel field sales representative for further information. Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information 26 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines § Thermal Metrology Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 27 3 Thermal Metrology This chapter discusses guidelines for testing thermal solutions, including measuring processor temperatures. In all cases, the thermal engineer must measure power dissipation and temperature to validate a thermal solution. To define the performance of a thermal solution the “thermal characterization parameter”, Ψ (“psi”) will be used. 3.1 Characterizing Cooling Performance Requirements The idea of a “thermal characterization parameter”, Ψ (“psi”), is a convenient way to characterize the performance needed for the thermal solution and to compare thermal solutions in identical situations (same heat source and local ambient conditions). The thermal characterization parameter is calculated using total package power. Note: Heat transfer is a three-dimensional phenomenon that can rarely be accurately and easily modeled by a single resistance parameter like Ψ. The case-to-local ambient thermal characterization parameter value (ΨCA) is used as a measure of the thermal performance of the overall thermal solution that is attached to the processor package. It is defined by the following equation, and measured in units of °C/W: ΨCA = (TC – TA) / PD (Equation 1) Where: ΨCA = Case-to-local ambient thermal characterization parameter (°C/W) TC = Processor case temperature (°C) TA = Local ambient temperature in chassis at processor (°C) PD = Processor total power dissipation (W) (assumes all power dissipates through the IHS) The case-to-local ambient thermal characterization parameter of the processor, ΨCA, is comprised of ΨCS, the thermal interface material thermal characterization parameter, and of ΨSA, the sink-to-local ambient thermal characterization parameter: ΨCA = ΨCS + ΨSA (Equation 2) Where: ΨCS = Thermal characterization parameter of the thermal interface material (°C/W) ΨSA = Thermal characterization parameter from heatsink-to-local ambient (°C/W) Thermal Metrology 28 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines ΨCS is strongly dependent on the thermal conductivity and thickness of the TIM between the heatsink and IHS. ΨSA is a measure of the thermal characterization parameter from the bottom of the heatsink to the local ambient air. ΨSA is dependent on the heatsink material, thermal conductivity, and geometry. It is also strongly dependent on the air velocity through the fins of the heatsink. Figure 3-1 illustrates the combination of the different thermal characterization parameters. Figure 3-1. Processor Thermal Characterization Parameter Relationships TIM TS TA ΨCA LGA775 Socket Processor IHS System Board TC Heatsink TIM TS TA ΨCA LGA775 Socket Processor IHS System Board TC Heatsink 3.1.1 Example The cooling performance, ΨCA, is then defined using the principle of thermal characterization parameter described above: • The case temperature TC-MAX and thermal design power TDP given in the processor datasheet. • Define a target local ambient temperature at the processor, TA. Since the processor thermal profile applies to all processor frequencies, it is important to identify the worst case (lowest ΨCA) for a targeted chassis characterized by TA to establish a design strategy. The following provides an illustration of how one might determine the appropriate performance targets. The example power and temperature numbers used here are not related to any specific Intel processor thermal specifications, and are for illustrative purposes only. Thermal Metrology Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 29 Assume the TDP, as listed in the datasheet, is 100 W and the maximum case temperature from the thermal profile for 100 W is 67 °C. Assume as well that the system airflow has been designed such that the local ambient temperature is 38 °C. Then the following could be calculated using equation 1 (shown on previous page): ΨCA = (TC,- TA) / TDP = (67 – 38) / 100 = 0.29 °C/W To determine the required heatsink performance, a heatsink solution provider would need to determine ΨCS performance for the selected TIM and mechanical load configuration. If the heatsink solution were designed to work with a TIM material performing at ΨCS ≤ 0.10 °C/W, solving for equation 2 from above, the performance of the heatsink would be: ΨSA = ΨCA − ΨCS = 0.29 − 0.10 = 0.19 °C/W 3.2 Processor Thermal Solution Performance Assessment Thermal performance of a heatsink should be assessed using a thermal test vehicle (TTV) provided by Intel. The TTV is a stable heat source that the user can make accurate power measurement, whereas processors can introduce additional factors that can impact test results. In particular, the power level from actual processors varies significantly, even when running the maximum power application provided by Intel, due to variances in the manufacturing process. The TTV provides consistent power and power density for thermal solution characterization and results can be easily translated to real processor performance. Accurate measurement of the power dissipated by an actual processor is beyond the scope of this document. Once the thermal solution is designed and validated with the TTV, it is strongly recommended to verify functionality of the thermal solution on real processors and on fully integrated systems. The Intel maximum power application enables steady power dissipation on a processor to assist in this testing. This maximum power application is provided by Intel. 3.3 Local Ambient Temperature Measurement Guidelines The local ambient temperature TA is the temperature of the ambient air surrounding the processor. For a passive heatsink, TA is defined as the heatsink approach air temperature; for an actively cooled heatsink, it is the temperature of inlet air to the active cooling fan. It is worthwhile to determine the local ambient temperature in the chassis around the processor to understand the effect it may have on the case temperature. TA is best measured by averaging temperature measurements at multiple locations in the heatsink inlet airflow. This method helps reduce error and eliminate minor spatial variations in temperature. The following guidelines are meant to enable accurate determination of the localized air temperature around the processor during system thermal testing. Thermal Metrology 30 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines For active heatsinks, it is important to avoid taking measurement in the dead flow zone that usually develops above the fan hub and hub spokes. Measurements should be taken at four different locations uniformly placed at the center of the annulus formed by the fan hub and the fan housing to evaluate the uniformity of the air temperature at the fan inlet. The thermocouples should be placed approximately 3 mm to 8 mm [0.1 to 0.3 in] above the fan hub vertically and halfway between the fan hub and the fan housing horizontally as shown in the ATX heatsink in Figure 3-2 (avoiding the hub spokes). Using an open bench to characterize an active heatsink can be useful, and usually ensures more uniform temperatures at the fan inlet. However, additional tests that include a solid barrier above the test motherboard surface can help evaluate the potential impact of the chassis. This barrier is typically clear Plexiglas*, extending at least 100 mm [4 in] in all directions beyond the edge of the thermal solution. Typical distance from the motherboard to the barrier is 81 mm [3.2 in]. For even more realistic airflow, the motherboard should be populated with significant elements like memory cards, graphic card, and chipset heatsink. If a barrier is used, the thermocouple can be taped directly to the barrier with a clear tape at the horizontal location as previously described, half way between the fan hub and the fan housing. If a variable speed fan is used, it may be useful to add a thermocouple taped to the barrier above the location of the temperature sensor used by the fan to check its speed setting against air temperature. When measuring TA in a chassis with a live motherboard, add-in cards, and other system components, it is likely that the TA measurements will reveal a highly non-uniform temperature distribution across the inlet fan section. For passive heatsinks, thermocouples should be placed approximately 13 mm to 25 mm [0.5 to 1.0 in] away from processor and heatsink as shown in Figure 3-3. The thermocouples should be placed approximately 51 mm [2.0 in] above the baseboard. This placement guideline is meant to minimize the effect of localized hot spots from baseboard components. Note: Testing an active heatsink with a variable speed fan can be done in a thermal chamber to capture the worst-case thermal environment scenarios. Otherwise, when doing a bench top test at room temperature, the fan regulation prevents the heatsink from operating at its maximum capability. To characterize the heatsink capability in the worst-case environment in these conditions, it is then necessary to disable the fan regulation and power the fan directly, based on guidance from the fan supplier. Thermal Metrology Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 31 Figure 3-2. Locations for Measuring Local Ambient Temperature, Active ATX Heatsink Note: Drawing Not to Scale Figure 3-3. Locations for Measuring Local Ambient Temperature, Passive Heatsink Note: Drawing Not to Scale Thermal Metrology 32 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 3.4 Processor Case Temperature Measurement Guidelines To ensure functionality and reliability, the processor is specified for proper operation when TC is maintained at or below the thermal profile as listed in the datasheet. The measurement location for TC is the geometric center of the IHS. Figure 2-2 shows the location for TC measurement. Special care is required when measuring TC to ensure an accurate temperature measurement. Thermocouples are often used to measure TC. Before any temperature measurements are made, the thermocouples must be calibrated, and the complete measurement system must be routinely checked against known standards. When measuring the temperature of a surface that is at a different temperature from the surrounding local ambient air, errors could be introduced in the measurements. The measurement errors could be caused by poor thermal contact between the junction of the thermocouple and the surface of the integrated heat spreader, heat loss by radiation, convection, by conduction through thermocouple leads, or by contact between the thermocouple cement and the heatsink base. Appendix D defines a reference procedure for attaching a thermocouple to the IHS of a 775-Land LGA processor package for TC measurement. This procedure takes into account the specific features of the 775-Land LGA package and of the LGA775 socket for which it is intended. § Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 33 4 Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature 4.1 Processor Power Dissipation An increase in processor operating frequency not only increases system performance, but also increases the processor power dissipation. The relationship between frequency and power is generalized in the following equation: P = CV2 F (where P = power, C = capacitance, V = voltage, F = frequency). From this equation, it is evident that power increases linearly with frequency and with the square of voltage. In the absence of power saving technologies, ever increasing frequencies will result in processors with power dissipations in the hundreds of watts. Fortunately, there are numerous ways to reduce the power consumption of a processor, and Intel is aggressively pursuing low power design techniques. For example, decreasing the operating voltage, reducing unnecessary transistor activity, and using more power efficient circuits can significantly reduce processor power consumption. An on-die thermal management feature called Thermal Monitor is available on the processor. It provides a thermal management approach to support the continued increases in processor frequency and performance. By using a highly accurate on-die temperature sensing circuit and a fast acting Thermal Control Circuit (TCC), the processor can rapidly initiate thermal management control. The Thermal Monitor can reduce cooling solution cost, by allowing thermal designs to target TDP. The processor also supports an additional power reduction capability known as Thermal Monitor 2 described in Section 4.2.3. 4.2 Thermal Monitor Implementation The Thermal Monitor consists of the following components: • A highly accurate on-die temperature sensing circuit • A bi-directional signal (PROCHOT#) that indicates if the processor has exceeded its maximum temperature or can be asserted externally to activate the Thermal Control Circuit (TCC) (see Section 4.2.1 for more details on user activation of TCC via PROCHOT# signal) • A Thermal Control Circuit that will attempt to reduce processor temperature by rapidly reducing power consumption when the on-die temperature sensor indicates that it has exceeded the maximum operating point. • Registers to determine the processor thermal status. Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature 34 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 4.2.1 PROCHOT# Signal The primary function of the PROCHOT# signal is to provide an external indication the processor has reached the TCC activation temperature. While PROCHOT# is asserted, the TCC will be active. Assertion of the PROCHOT# signal is independent of any register settings within the processor. It is asserted any time the processor die temperature reaches the trip point. PROCHOT# can be configured via BIOS as an output or bi-directional signal. As an output, PROCHOT# will go active when the processor temperature of either core reaches the TCC activation temperature. As an input, assertion of PROCHOT# will activate the TCC for both cores. The TCC will remain active until the system deasserts PROCHOT#. The temperature at which the PROCHOT# signal goes active is individually calibrated during manufacturing. Once configured, the processor temperature at which the PROCHOT# signal is asserted is not re-configurable. One application of the Bi-directional PROCHOT# is for the thermal protection of voltage regulators (VR). System designers can implement a circuit to monitor the VR temperature and activate the TCC when the temperature limit of the VR is reached. By asserting PROCHOT# (pulled-low) which activates the TCC, the VR can cool down as a result of reduced processor power consumption. Bi-directional PROCHOT# can allow VR thermal designs to target maximum sustained current instead of maximum current. Systems should still provide proper cooling for the VR, and rely on bidirectional PROCHOT# signal only as a backup in case of system cooling failure. Note: A thermal solution designed to meet the thermal profile specifications should rarely experience activation of the TCC as indicated by the PROCHOT# signal going active. 4.2.2 Thermal Control Circuit The Thermal Control Circuit portion of the Thermal Monitor must be enabled for the processor to operate within specifications. The Thermal Monitor’s TCC, when active, will attempt to lower the processor temperature by reducing the processor power consumption. There are two methods by which TCC can reduce processor power dissipation. These methods are referred to as Thermal Monitor 1 (TM1) and Thermal Monitor 2 (TM2). 4.2.2.1 Thermal Monitor In the original implementation of thermal monitor this is done by changing the duty cycle of the internal processor clocks, resulting in a lower effective frequency. When active, the TCC turns the processor clocks off and then back on with a predetermined duty cycle. The duty cycle is processor specific, and is fixed for a particular processor. The maximum time period the clocks are disabled is ~3 μs. This time period is frequency dependent and higher frequency processors will disable the internal clocks for a shorter time period. Figure 4-1 illustrates the relationship between the internal processor clocks and PROCHOT#. Performance counter registers, status bits in model specific registers (MSRs), and the PROCHOT# output pin are available to monitor the Thermal Monitor behavior. Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 35 Figure 4-1. Thermal Monitor Control PROCHOT# Resultant internal clock Normal clock Internal clock Duty cycle control 4.2.3 Thermal Monitor 2 The second method of power reduction is TM2. TM2 provides an efficient means of reducing the power consumption within the processor and limiting the processor temperature. When TM2 is enabled, and a high temperature situation is detected, the enhanced TCC will be activated. The enhanced TCC causes the processor to adjust its operating frequency (by dropping the bus-to-core multiplier to its minimum available value) and input voltage identification (VID) value. This combination of reduced frequency and VID results in a reduction in processor power consumption. A processor enabled for TM2 includes two operating points, each consisting of a specific operating frequency and voltage. The first operating point represents the normal operating condition for the processor. The second operating point consists of both a lower operating frequency and voltage. When the TCC is activated, the processor automatically transitions to the new frequency. This transition occurs very rapidly (on the order of 5 microseconds). During the frequency transition, the processor is unable to service any bus requests, all bus traffic is blocked. Edge-triggered interrupts will be latched and kept pending until the processor resumes operation at the new frequency. Once the new operating frequency is engaged, the processor will transition to the new core operating voltage by issuing a new VID code to the voltage regulator. The voltage regulator must support VID transitions in order to support TM2. During the voltage change, it will be necessary to transition through multiple VID codes to reach the target operating voltage. Each step will be one VID table entry (i.e. 12.5 mV steps). The processor continues to execute instructions during the voltage transition. Operation at the lower voltage reduces the power consumption of the processor, providing a temperature reduction. Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature 36 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Once the processor has sufficiently cooled, and a minimum activation time has expired, the operating frequency and voltage transition back to the normal system operating point. Transition of the VID code will occur first, in order to insure proper operation once the processor reaches its normal operating frequency. Refer to Figure 4-2 for an illustration of this ordering. Figure 4-2. Thermal Monitor 2 Frequency and Voltage Ordering VID Frequency Temperature TTM2 f MAX f TM2 VID VIDTM2 PROCHOT# Time Refer to the datasheet for further information on TM2. 4.2.4 Operation and Configuration Thermal Monitor must be enabled to ensure proper processor operation. The Thermal Control Circuit feature can be configured and monitored in a number of ways. OEMs are required to enable the Thermal Control Circuit while using various registers and outputs to monitor the processor thermal status. The Thermal Control Circuit is enabled by the BIOS setting a bit in an MSR (model specific register). Enabling the Thermal Control Circuit allows the processor to attempt to maintain a safe operating temperature without the need for special software drivers or interrupt handling routines. When the Thermal Control Circuit has been enabled, processor power consumption will be reduced after the thermal sensor detects a high temperature, i.e. PROCHOT# assertion. The Thermal Control Circuit and PROCHOT# transitions to inactive once the temperature has been reduced below the thermal trip point, although a small time-based hysteresis has been included to prevent multiple PROCHOT# transitions around the trip point. External hardware can monitor PROCHOT# and generate an interrupt whenever there is a transition from active-toinactive or inactive-to-active. PROCHOT# can also be configured to generate an internal interrupt which would initiate an OEM supplied interrupt service routine. Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 37 Regardless of the configuration selected, PROCHOT# will always indicate the thermal status of the processor. The power reduction mechanism of thermal monitor can also be activated manually using an “on-demand” mode. Refer to Section 4.2.5 for details on this feature. 4.2.5 On-Demand Mode For testing purposes, the thermal control circuit may also be activated by setting bits in the ACPI MSRs. The MSRs may be set based on a particular system event (e.g., an interrupt generated after a system event), or may be set at any time through the operating system or custom driver control thus forcing the thermal control circuit on. This is referred to as “on-demand” mode. Activating the thermal control circuit may be useful for thermal solution investigations or for performance implication studies. When using the MSRs to activate the on-demand clock modulation feature, the duty cycle is configurable in steps of 12.5%, from 12.5% to 87.5%. For any duty cycle, the maximum time period the clocks are disabled is ~3 μs. This time period is frequency dependent, and decreases as frequency increases. To achieve different duty cycles, the length of time that the clocks are disabled remains constant, and the time period that the clocks are enabled is adjusted to achieve the desired ratio. For example, if the clock disable period is 3 µs, and a duty cycle of ¼ (25%) is selected, the clock on time would be reduced to approximately 1 μs [on time (1 μs) ÷ total cycle time (3 + 1) μs = ¼ duty cycle]. Similarly, for a duty cycle of 7/8 (87.5%), the clock on time would be extended to 21 μs [21 ÷ (21 + 3) = 7/8 duty cycle]. In a high temperature situation, if the thermal control circuit and ACPI MSRs (automatic and on-demand modes) are used simultaneously, the fixed duty cycle determined by automatic mode would take precedence. Note: On-demand mode can not activate the power reduction mechanism of Thermal Monitor 2 4.2.6 System Considerations Intel requires the Thermal Monitor and Thermal Control Circuit to be enabled for all processors. The thermal control circuit is intended to protect against short term thermal excursions that exceed the capability of a well designed processor thermal solution. Thermal Monitor should not be relied upon to compensate for a thermal solution that does not meet the thermal profile up to the thermal design power (TDP). Each application program has its own unique power profile, although the profile has some variability due to loop decisions, I/O activity and interrupts. In general, compute intensive applications with a high cache hit rate dissipate more processor power than applications that are I/O intensive or have low cache hit rates. The processor TDP is based on measurements of processor power consumption while running various high power applications. This data is used to determine those applications that are interesting from a power perspective. These applications are then evaluated in a controlled thermal environment to determine their sensitivity to activation of the thermal control circuit. This data is used to derive the TDP targets published in the processor datasheet. Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature 38 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines A system designed to meet the thermal profile specification published in the processor datasheet greatly reduces the probability of real applications causing the thermal control circuit to activate under normal operating conditions. Systems that do not meet these specifications could be subject to more frequent activation of the thermal control circuit depending upon ambient air temperature and application power profile. Moreover, if a system is significantly under designed, there is a risk that the Thermal Monitor feature will not be capable of reducing the processor power and temperature and the processor could shutdown and signal THERMTRIP#. For information regarding THERMTRIP#, refer to the processor datasheet and to Section 4.2.8 of this Thermal Design Guidelines. 4.2.7 Operating System and Application Software Considerations The Thermal Monitor feature and its thermal control circuit work seamlessly with ACPI compliant operating systems. The Thermal Monitor feature is transparent to application software since the processor bus snooping, ACPI timer, and interrupts are active at all times. 4.2.8 THERMTRIP# Signal In the event of a catastrophic cooling failure, the processor will automatically shut down when the silicon temperature has exceeded the TCC activation temperature by approximately 20 to 25 °C. At this point the system bus signal THERMTRIP# goes active and power must be removed from the processor. THERMTRIP# activation is independent of processor activity and does not generate any bus cycles. Refer to the processor datasheet for more information about THERMTRIP#. The temperature where the THERMTRIP# signal goes active is individually calibrated during manufacturing and once configuration can not be changed. 4.2.9 Cooling System Failure Warning It may be useful to use the PROCHOT# signal as an indication of cooling system failure. Messages could be sent to the system administrator to warn of the cooling failure, while the thermal control circuit would allow the system to continue functioning or allow a normal system shutdown. If no thermal management action is taken, the silicon temperature may exceed the operating limits, causing THERMTRIP# to activate and shut down the processor. Regardless of the system design requirements or thermal solution ability, the Thermal Monitor feature must still be enabled to ensure proper processor operation. 4.2.10 Digital Thermal Sensor Multiple digital thermal sensors can be implemented within the package without adding a pair of signal pins per sensor as required with the thermal diode. The digital thermal sensor is easier to place in thermally sensitive locations of the processor than the thermal diode. This is achieved due to a smaller foot print and decreased sensitivity to noise. Since the DTS is factory set on a per-part basis there is no need for the health monitor components to be updated at each processor family Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 39 The processor introduces the Digital Thermal Sensor (DTS) as the on-die sensor to use for fan speed control (FSC). The DTS will eventually replace the on-die thermal diode used in pervious products. The processor will have both the DTS and thermal diode enabled. The DTS is monitoring the same sensor that activates the TCC (see Section 4.2.2). Readings from the DTS are relative to the activation of the TCC. The DTS value where TCC activation occurs is 0 (zero). A TCONTROL value will be provided for use with DTS. The usage model for TCONTROL with the DTS is the same as with the on-die thermal diode: • If the Digital thermal sensor is less than TCONTROL, the fan speed can be reduced. • If the Digital thermal sensor is greater than or equal to TCONTROL, then TC must be maintained at or below the Thermal Profile for the measured power dissipation. The calculation of TCONTROL is slightly different from previous product. There is no base value to sum with the TOFFSET located in the same MSR as used in previous processors. The BIOS only needs to read the TOFFSET MSR and provide this value to the fan speed control device. Figure 4-3. TCONTROL for Digital Thermal Sensor Digital Thermometer Temperature 30 20 10 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 70 60 50 40 Tcontrol= 66 Tcontrol= -10 Fan Speed Temperature Time Power Thermal Diode Temperature 30 20 10 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 70 60 50 40 Tcontrol= 66 Tcontrol Fan Speed Temperature Time Power Digital Thermometer Temperature 30 20 10 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 70 60 50 40 Tcontrol= 66 Tcontrol= -10 Fan Speed Temperature Time Power Thermal Diode Temperature 30 20 10 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 70 60 50 40 Tcontrol= 66 Tcontrol Fan Speed Temperature Time Power Note: The processor has both the DTS and thermal diode. The TCONTROL in the MSR is relevant only to the DTS. 4.2.11 Platform Environmental Control Interface (PECI) The PECI interface is a proprietary single wire bus between the processor and the chipset or other health monitoring device. At this time the digital thermal sensor is the only data being transmitted. For an overview of the PECI interface see PECI Feature Set Overview. For additional information on the PECI, see the datasheet. The PECI bus is available on pin G5 of the LGA 775 socket. Intel chipsets beginning with the ICH8 have included PECI host controller. The PECI interface and the Manageability Engine are key elements to the Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature 40 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines QST), see Chapter 7 and the Intel® Quiet System Technology Configuration and Tuning Manual. Intel has worked with many vendors that provide fan speed control devices to provide PECI host controllers. Please consult the local representative for your preferred vendor for their product plans and availability. § Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 41 5 Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 5.1 Overview of the Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Reference Design The reference thermal module assembly is a Type II BTX compliant design and is compliant with the reference BTX motherboard keep-out and height recommendations defined Section 6.6. The solution comes as an integrated assembly. An isometric view of the assembly is provided Figure 5-4. 5.1.1 Target Heatsink Performance Table 5-1 provides the target heatsink performance for the processor with the BTX boundary conditions. The results will be evaluated using the test procedure described in Section 5.2. The table also includes a TA assumption of 35.5 °C for the Intel reference thermal solution at the processor fan heatsink inlet discussed Section 3.3. The analysis assumes a uniform external ambient temperature to the chassis of 35 °C across the fan inlet, resulting in a temperature rise, TR, of 0.5 °C. Meeting TA and ΨCA targets can maximize processor performance (refer to Sections 2.2, 2.4. and Chapter 4). Minimizing TR, can lead to improved acoustics. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 42 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Table 5-1. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Type II Reference TMA Performance Processor Thermal Requirements, Ψca (Mean + 3σ) TA Assumption Notes Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C 0.38 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,2 Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB / 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 72.0 °C 0.56 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,2,3 Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 61.4 °C 0.40 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,2 Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 73.3 °C 0.58 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,2,3 Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C 0.40 °C/W 35.5 °C 1 Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C 0.58 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,3 Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core Processor E1000 series at Tc-max of 73.3° C 0.58 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,3 NOTES: 1. Performance targets (Ψ ca) as measured with a live processor at TDP. 2. The difference in Ψ ca between the Intel® Core™2 Duo 4 MB and 2 MB is due to a slight difference in the die size. 3. BTX Type II reference TMA is the higher thermal solution performance of the Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB / 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 72.0 °C, Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 73.3 °C, Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C, and Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core Processor E1000 Series at Tc-max of 73.3° C. Customers can generate an improvement in cost saving for these processors to likely use the designs with the cheater TIM, the cheater fan and the lower fin density extrusion. 5.1.2 Acoustics To optimize acoustic emission by the fan heatsink assembly, the Type II reference design implements a variable speed fan. A variable speed fan allows higher thermal performance at higher fan inlet temperatures (TA) and the appropriate thermal performance with improved acoustics at lower fan inlet temperatures. Using the example in Table 5-2 for the Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C the required fan speed necessary to meet thermal specifications can be controlled by the fan inlet temperature and should comply with the following requirements. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 43 Table 5-2. Acoustic Targets Fan Speed RPM Thermistor Set Point Acoustic Thermal Requirements, Ψca Notes ~ 5300 High TA ≥ 35 °C ≤ 6.4 BA 0.38 °C/W Case 1: Thermal Design Power Maximum fan speed 100% PWM duty cycle ~ 2500 Low TA = 23 °C No Target Defined 0.56 °C/W Case 2 Thermal Design Power System (PSU, HDD, TMA) Fan speed limited by the fan hub thermistor ~ 1400 Low TA = 23 °C ≤ 3.4 BA ~0.87 °C/W Case 3 50% Thermal Design Power TMA Only ~ 1400 Low TA = 23 °C ≤ 4.0 BA ~0.87 °C/W Case 3 50% Thermal Design Power System (PSU, HDD, TMA) NOTES: 1. Acoustic performance is defined in terms of measured sound power (LwA) as defined in ISO 9296 standard, and measured according to ISO 7779. 2. Acoustic testing will be for the TMA only when installed in a BTX S2 chassis for Case 1 and 3 3. Acoustics testing for Case 2 will be system level in the same a BTX S2 reference chassis and commercially available power supply. Acoustic data for Case 2 will be provided in the validation report but this condition is not a target for the design. The acoustic model is predicting that the power supply fan will be the acoustic limiter. 4. The fan speeds (RPM) are estimates for one of the two reference fans and will be adjusted to meet thermal performance targets then acoustic target during validation. The designer should identify the fan speed required to meet the effective fan curve shown in Section 5.1.3 While the fan hub thermistor helps optimize acoustics at high processor workloads by adapting the maximum fan speed to support the processor thermal profile, additional acoustic improvements can be achieved at lower processor workload by using the TCONTROL specifications described in Section 2.2.3. Intel’s recommendation is to use the fan with 4 Wire PWM Controlled to implement fan speed control capability based the digital thermal sensor. Refer to Chapter 7 for further details. Note: Appendix G gives detailed fan performance for the Intel reference thermal solutions with 4 Wire PWM Controlled fan. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 44 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 5.1.3 Effective Fan Curve The TMA must fulfill the processor cooling requirements shown in Table 5-1 when it is installed in a functional BTX system. When installed in a system, the TMA must operate against the backpressure created by the chassis impedance (due to vents, bezel, peripherals, etc…) and will operate at lower net airflow than if it were tested outside of the system on a bench top or open air environment. Therefore an allowance must be made to accommodate or predict the reduction in Thermal Module performance due to the reduction in heatsink airflow from chassis impedance. For this reason, it is required that the Thermal Module satisfy the prescribed ΨCA requirements when operating against an impedance that is characteristic for BTX platforms. Because of the coupling between TMA thermal performance and system impedance, the designer should understand the TMA effective fan curve. This effective fan curve represents the performance of the fan component AND the impedance of the stator, heatsink, duct, and flow partitioning devices. The BTX system integrator will be able to evaluate a TMA based on the effective fan curve of the assembly and the airflow impedance of their target system. Note: It is likely that at some operating points the fans speed will be driven by the system airflow requirements and not the processor thermal limits. Figure 5-1 shows the effective fan curve for the reference design TMA. These curves are based on analysis. The boundary conditions used are the S2 6.9L reference chassis, the reference TMA with the flow portioning device, extrusion and an AVC Type II fan geometry. When selecting a fan for use in the TMA care should be taken that similar effective fan curves can be achieved. Final verification requires the overlay of the Type II MASI curve to ensure thermal compliance. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 45 Figure 5-1. Effective TMA Fan Curves with Reference Extrusion 0.000 0.050 0.100 0.150 0.200 0.250 0.300 0.350 0.400 0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 Airflow (cfm) dP (in. H2O) Reference TMA @ 5300 RPM Reference TMA @ 2500 RPM Reference TMA @ 1200 RPM 5.1.4 Voltage Regulator Thermal Management The BTX TMA is integral to the cooling of the processor voltage regulator (VR). The reference design TMA will include a flow partitioning device to ensure an appropriate airflow balance between the TMA and the VR. In validation the need for this component will be evaluated. The BTX thermal management strategy relies on the Thermal Module to provide effective cooling for the voltage regulator (VR) chipset and system memory components on the motherboard. The Thermal Module is required to have features that allow for airflow to bypass the heatsink and flow over the VR region on both the primary and secondary sides of the board. The following requirements apply to VR cooling. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 46 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Table 5-3. VR Airflow Requirements Item Target Minimum VR bypass airflow for 775_VR_CONFIG_06 processors 2.4 CFM NOTES: 1. This is the recommended airflow rate that should be delivered to the VR when the VR power is at a maximum in order to support the 775_VR_CONFIG_06 processors at TDP power dissipation and the chassis external environment temperature is at 35 ºC. Less airflow is necessary when the VR power is not at a maximum or if the external ambient temperature is less than 35 ºC. 2. This recommended airflow rate is based on the requirements for the Intel® 965 Express Chipset Family. 5.1.5 Altitude The reference TMA will be evaluated at sea level. However, many companies design products that must function reliably at high altitude, typically 1,500 m [5,000 ft] or more. Air-cooled temperature calculations and measurements at sea level must be adjusted to take into account altitude effects like variation in air density and overall heat capacity. This often leads to some degradation in thermal solution performance compared to what is obtained at sea level, with lower fan performance and higher surface temperatures. The system designer needs to account for altitude effects in the overall system thermal design to make sure that the TC requirement for the processor is met at the targeted altitude. 5.1.6 Reference Heatsink Thermal Validation The Intel reference heatsink will be validated within the specific boundary conditions based on the methodology described Section 5.2. Testing is done in a BTX chassis at ambient lab temperature. The test results, for a number of samples, will be reported in terms of a worst-case mean + 3σ value for thermal characterization parameter using real processors (based on the thermal test vehicle correction factors). 5.2 Environmental Reliability Testing 5.2.1 Structural Reliability Testing Structural reliability tests consist of unpackaged, system -level vibration and shock tests of a given thermal solution in the assembled state. The thermal solution should meet the specified thermal performance targets after these tests are conducted; however, the test conditions outlined here may differ from your own system requirements. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 47 5.2.1.1 Random Vibration Test Procedure Recommended performance requirement for a system: • Duration: 10 min/axis, 3 axes • Frequency Range: 5 Hz to 500 Hz 5 Hz @ .001 g2/Hz to 20 Hz @ 0.01 g2/Hz (slope up) 20 Hz to 500 Hz @ 0.01 g2/Hz (flat) • Power Spectral Density (PSD) Profile: 2.2 G RMS Figure 5-2. Random Vibration PSD Vibration System Level 0.0001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000 Hz g2/Hz + 3 dB Control Limit - 3 dB Control Limit 5.2.1.2 Shock Test Procedure Recommended performance requirement for a system: •Quantity: 2 drops for + and - directions in each of 3 perpendicular axes (i.e., total 12 drops). •Profile: 25 G trapezoidal waveform 225 in/sec minimum velocity change. (systems > 20 lbm) 250 in/sec minimum velocity change. (systems < 20 lbm) •Setup: Mount sample system on tester. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 48 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Figure 5-3. Shock Acceleration Curve 5.2.1.2.1 Recommended Test Sequence Each test sequence should start with components (i.e., motherboard, heatsink assembly, etc.) that have never been previously submitted to any reliability testing. The test sequence should always start with a visual inspection after assembly, and BIOS/CPU/Memory test (refer to Section 6.3.3). Prior to the mechanical shock & vibration test, the units under test should be preconditioned for 72 hours at 45 ºC. The purpose is to account for load relaxation during burn-in stage. The stress test should be followed by a visual inspection and then BIOS/CPU/Memory test. 5.2.1.2.2 Post-Test Pass Criteria The post-test pass criteria are: 1. No significant physical damage to the heatsink attach mechanism (including such items as clip and motherboard fasteners). 2. Heatsink must remain attached to the motherboard. 3. Heatsink remains seated and its bottom remains mated flatly against IHS surface. No visible gap between the heatsink base and processor IHS. No visible tilt of the heatsink with respect to its attach mechanism. 4. No signs of physical damage on motherboard surface due to impact of heatsink or heatsink attach mechanism. 5. No visible physical damage to the processor package. 6. Successful BIOS/Processor/memory test of post-test samples. 7. Thermal compliance testing to demonstrate that the case temperature specification can be met. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 49 5.2.2 Power Cycling Thermal performance degradation due to TIM degradation is evaluated using power cycling testing. The test is defined by 7500 cycles for the case temperature from room temperature (~23 ºC) to the maximum case temperature defined by the thermal profile at TDP. 5.2.3 Recommended BIOS/CPU/Memory Test Procedures This test is to ensure proper operation of the product before and after environmental stresses, with the thermal mechanical enabling components assembled. The test shall be conducted on a fully operational motherboard that has not been exposed to any battery of tests prior to the test being considered. Testing setup should include the following components, properly assembled and/or connected: • Appropriate system motherboard • Processor • All enabling components, including socket and thermal solution parts • Power supply • Disk drive • Video card • DIMM • Keyboard • Monitor The pass criterion is that the system under test shall successfully complete the checking of BIOS, basic processor functions and memory, without any errors. 5.3 Material and Recycling Requirements Material shall be resistant to fungal growth. Examples of non-resistant materials include cellulose materials, animal and vegetable based adhesives, grease, oils, and many hydrocarbons. Synthetic materials such as PVC formulations, certain polyurethane compositions (e.g., polyester and some polyethers), plastics which contain organic fillers of laminating materials, paints, and varnishes also are susceptible to fungal growth. If materials are not fungal growth resistant, then MILSTD-810E, Method 508.4 must be performed to determine material performance. Material used shall not have deformation or degradation in a temperature life test. Any plastic component exceeding 25 grams must be recyclable per the European Blue Angel recycling standards. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 50 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 5.4 Safety Requirements Heatsink and attachment assemblies shall be consistent with the manufacture of units that meet the safety standards: • UL Recognition-approved for flammability at the system level. All mechanical and thermal enabling components must be a minimum UL94V-2 approved. • CSA Certification. All mechanical and thermal enabling components must have CSA certification. • All components (in particular the heatsink fins) must meet the test requirements of UL1439 for sharp edges. • If the International Accessibility Probe specified in IEC 950 can access the moving parts of the fan, consider adding safety feature so that there is no risk of personal injury. 5.5 Geometric Envelope for Intel Reference BTX Thermal Module Assembly Figure 7-50 through Figure 7-54 in Appendix H gives the motherboard keep-out information for the BTX thermal mechanical solutions. Additional information on BTX design considerations can be found in Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) System Design Guide available at http://www.formfactors.org. The maximum height of the TMA above the motherboard is 60.60 mm [2.386 inches], for compliance with the motherboard primary side height constraints defined in the BTX Interface Specification for Zone A, found at http://www.formfactors.org. Figure 5-4. Intel Type II TMA 65 W Reference Design Development vendor information for the Intel Type II TMA Reference Solution is provided in Appendix I. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 51 5.6 Preload and TMA Stiffness 5.6.1 Structural Design Strategy Structural design strategy for the Intel Type II TMA is to minimize upward board deflection during shock to help protect the LGA775 socket. BTX thermal solutions utilize the SRM and TMA that together resists local board curvature under the socket and minimize, board deflection (Figure 5-5). In addition, a moderate preload provides initial downward deflection. Figure 5-5. Upward Board Deflection During Shock 5.6.2 TMA Preload versus Stiffness The Thermal Module assembly is required to provide a static preload to ensure protection against fatigue failure of socket solder joint. The allowable preload range for BTX platforms is provided in Table 5-4, but the specific target value is a function of the Thermal Module effective stiffness. The solution space for the Thermal Module effective stiffness and applied preload combinations is shown by the shaded region of Figure 5-6. This solution space shows that the Thermal Module assembly must have an effective stiffness that is sufficiently large such that the minimum preload determined from the relationship requirement in Figure 5-6 does not exceed the maximum allowed preload shown in Table 5-4. Furthermore, if the Thermal Module effective stiffness is so large that the minimum preload determined from Figure 5-6 is below the minimum required value given in Less curvature in region between SRM and TMA Shock Load Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 52 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Table 5-4, then the Thermal Module should be re-designed to have a preload that lies within the range given in Table 5-4, allowing for preload tolerances. Table 5-4. Processor Preload Limits Parameter Minimum Required Maximum Allowed Notes Processor Preload 98 N [22 lbf] 222 N [50 lbf] 1 NOTES: 1. These values represent upper and lower bounds for the processor preload. The nominal preload design point for the Thermal Module is based on a combination of requirements of the TIM, ease of assembly and the Thermal Module effective stiffness. Figure 5-6. Minimum Required Processor Preload to Thermal Module Assembly Stiffness NOTES: 1. The shaded region shown is the acceptable domain for Thermal Module assembly effective stiffness and processor preload combinations. The Thermal Module design should have a design preload and stiffness that lies within this region. The design tolerance for the preload and TMA stiffness should also reside within this boundary. Note that the lower and upper horizontal boundaries represent the preload limits provided in Table 5-4. The equation for the left hand boundary is described in note 2. 2. The equation for this section of the preload-Thermal Module stiffness boundary is given by the following relationship: Min Preload = 1.38E-3*k^2 – 1.18486k + 320.24753 for k < 300 N/mm where k is the Thermal Module assembly effective stiffness. Please note that this equation is only valid in the stiffness domain of 93N/mm < k < 282N/mm. This equation would not apply, for example, for TMA stiffness less than 93N/mm, 3. The target stiffness for the 65W Type II TMA reference design is 484 N/mm (2764 lb / in). Note: These preload and stiffness recommendations are specific to the TMA mounting scheme that meets the BTX Interface Specification and Support Retention Mechanism (SRM) Design Guide. For TMA mounting schemes that use only the motherboard Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 53 mounting hole position for TMA attach, the required preload is approximately 10-15N greater than the values stipulated in Figure 5-6; however, Intel has not conducted any validation testing with this TMA mounting scheme. Figure 5-7. Thermal Module Attach Pointes and Duct-to-SRM Interface Features SRM Front attach point use 6x32 screw See detail A Detail A See detail B Detail B Rear attach point use 6x32 screw Chassis PEM nut Duct front interface feature see note 2 SRM Front attach point use 6x32 screw See detail A Detail A See detail B Detail B Rear attach point use 6x32 screw Chassis PEM nut Duct front interface feature see note 2 NOTES: 1. For clarity the motherboard is not shown in this figure. In an actual assembly, the captive 6x32 screws in the thermal module pass through the rear holes in the motherboard designated in the socket keep-in Figure 7-50 through Figure 7-54 in Appendix H and screw into the SRM and chassis PEM features. 2. This front duct ramp feature has both outer and inner lead-in that allows the feature to slide easily into the SRM slot and around the chassis PEM nut. Note that the front PEM nut is part of the chassis not the SRM. § Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 54 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 55 6 ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 6.1 ATX Reference Design Requirements This chapter will document the requirements for an active air-cooled design, with a fan installed at the top of the heatsink. The thermal technology required for the processor. The processors of Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C, Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 61.4 °C and Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C require a thermal solution equivalent to the D60188-001 reference design, see Figure 6-1 for an exploded view of this reference design. Note: The part number D60188-001 provided in this document is for reference only. The revision number -001 may be subject to change without notice. The D60188-001 reference design takes advantage of an acoustic improvement to reduce the fan speed to show the acoustic advantage (its acoustic results show in the Table 6-3). The D60188-001 reference design takes advantage of the cost saving for the light fan/heatsink mass (450g) and the new TIM material (Dow Corning TC-1996 grease). A bottom view of the copper core applied by this grease is provided Figure 6-3. ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 56 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Figure 6-1. D60188-001Reference Design – Exploded View The processors of Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB / 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 72.0 °C, Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 73.3 °C, Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C, and Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core processor E1000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C require a thermal solution equivalent to the E18764-001 reference design; see Figure 6-2 for an exploded view of this reference design. Note: The part number E18764-001 provided in this document is for reference only. The revision number -001 may be subject to change without notice. The E18764-001 reference design takes advantage of an acoustic improvement to reduce the fan speed to show the acoustic advantage (its acoustic results show in the Table 6-4). The E18764-001 reference design takes advantage of the cost savings for the several features of the design including the reduced heatsink height, inserted aluminum core, and the new TIM material (Dow Corning TC-1996 grease, see Figure 6-3). The overall 46mm height thermal solution supports the unique and smaller desktop PCs including small and ultra small form factors, down to the 5L size, see uATX SFF Guidance for additional details on uATX SFF design. ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 57 Figure 6-2. E18764-001 Reference Design – Exploded View Figure 6-3. Bottom View of Copper Core Applied by TC-1996 Grease The ATX motherboard keep-out and the height recommendations defined Section 6.6 remain the same for a thermal solution for the processor in the 775-Land LGA package. Note: If this fan design is used in your product and you will deliver it to end use customers, you have the responsibility to determine an adequate level of protection (e.g., protection barriers, a cage, or an interlock) against contact with the energized fan by the user during user servicing. Note: Development vendor information for the reference design is provided in Appendix I. ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 58 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 6.2 Validation Results for Reference Design 6.2.1 Heatsink Performance Table 6-1 provides the D60188-001 heatsink performance for the processors of Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C, Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 61.4 °C, and Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C. Table 6-2 provides the E18764-001 heatsink performance for the processors of Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB / 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 72.0 °C and Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 73.3 °C, Intel® Pentium® dual-core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C, and Intel® Celeron® dual-core processor E1000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C. The results are based on the test procedure described in Section 6.2.4. The tables also include a TA assumption of 40°C for the Intel reference thermal solution at the processor fan heatsink inlet discussed Section 2.4.1. Table 6-1. D60188-001 Reference Heatsink Performance Processor Target Thermal Performance, Ψca (Mean + 3σ) TA Assumption Notes Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C 0.31 °C/W 40 °C 1, 2 Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 61.4 °C 0.33 °C/W 40 °C 1, 2 Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C 0.33 °C/W 40 °C 1 NOTES: 1. Performance targets (Ψ ca) as measured with a live processor at TDP. 2. The difference in Ψ ca between the Intel® Core™2 Duo 4 MB and 2 MB is due to a slight difference in the die size. Table 6-2. E18764-001 Reference Heatsink Performance Processor Target Thermal Performance, Ψca (Mean + 3σ) TA Assumption Notes Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB / 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 72.0 °C 0.49 °C/W 40 °C 1, 2 Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 73.3 °C 0.51 °C/W 40 °C 1, 2 Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C 0.51 °C/W 40 °C 1 Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core processor E1000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C 0.51 °C/W 40 °C 1 NOTES: 1. Performance targets (Ψ ca) as measured with a live processor at TDP. 2. The difference in Ψ ca between the Intel® Core™2 Duo 4 MB and 2 MB is due to a slight difference in the die size. ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 59 6.2.2 Acoustics To optimize acoustic emission by the fan heatsink assembly, the reference design implements a variable speed fan. A variable speed fan allows higher thermal performance at higher fan inlet temperatures (TA) and lower thermal performance with improved acoustics at lower fan inlet temperatures. The required fan speed necessary to meet thermal specifications can be controlled by the fan inlet temperature and should comply with requirements listed in the following table. Table 6-3. Acoustic Results for ATX Reference Heatsink (D60188-001) Fan Speed RPM Thermistor Set Point Acoustic Thermal Requirements, Ψca Notes 2900 High TA = 40 °C 4.5 BA 0.31 °C/W (Core™2 Duo 4MB at Tc-max of 60.1 °C) 0.33 °C/W (Core™2 Duo 2MB at Tc-max of 61.4 °C) 0.33 °C/W (E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C ) 1800 Low TA = 30 °C 3.5 BA 0.46 °C/W (Core™2 Duo 4MB at Tc-max of 60.1 °C) 0.48 °C/W (Core™2 Duo 2MB at Tc-max of 61.4 °C) 0.48 °C/W (E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C) Thermal Design Power, Fan speed limited by the fan hub thermistor 1000 Low TA = 28 °C Minimum fan speed Table 6-4. Acoustic Results for ATX Reference Heatsink (E18764-001) Fan Speed RPM Thermistor Set Point Acoustic Thermal Requirements, Ψca Notes 3900 High TA = 40 °C 5.0 BA • 0.49 °C/W (Intel Core™2 Duo processor, 4 MB / 2 MB at Tc-max of 72.0 °C) • 0.51 °C/W (Intel Core™2 Duo processor, 2 MB at Tc-max of 73.3 °C) • 0.51 °C/W (E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C ) • 0.51 °C/W (E1000 Series of Tc-max of 73.3 °C ) 2000 Low TA = 30 °C 3.5 BA • 0.65 °C/W (Intel Core™2 Duo processor, 4 MB / 2 MB at Tc-max of 72.0 °C) • 0.67 °C/W (Intel Core™2 Duo processor, 2 MB at Tc-max of 73.3 °C) • 0.67 °C/W (E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C) • 0.67 °C/W (E1000 Series of Tc-max of 73.3 °C) Thermal Design Power, Fan speed limited by the fan hub thermistor NOTES: 1. Acoustic performance is defined in terms of measured sound power (LwA) as defined in ISO 9296 standard, and measured according to ISO 7779. While the fan hub thermistor helps optimize acoustics at high processor workloads by adapting the maximum fan speed to support the processor thermal profile, additional acoustic improvements can be achieved at lower processor workload by using the ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 60 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines TCONTROL specifications described in Section 2.2.3. Intel recommendation is to use the fan with 4 Wire PWM Controlled to implement fan speed control capability based digital thermal sensor temperature. Refer to Chapter 7 for further details. Note: Appendix G gives detailed fan performance for the Intel reference thermal solutions with 4 Wire PWM Controlled fan. 6.2.3 Altitude Many companies design products that must function reliably at high altitude, typically 1,500 m [5,000 ft] or more. Air-cooled temperature calculations and measurements at the test site elevation must be adjusted to take into account altitude effects like variation in air density and overall heat capacity. This often leads to some degradation in thermal solution performance compared to what is obtained at sea level, with lower fan performance and higher surface temperatures. The system designer needs to account for altitude effects in the overall system thermal design to make sure that the TC requirement for the processor is met at the targeted altitude. 6.2.4 Heatsink Thermal Validation Intel recommends evaluation of the heatsink within the specific boundary conditions based on the methodology described Section 6.3. Testing is done on bench top test boards at ambient lab temperature. In particular, for the reference heatsink, the Plexiglas* barrier is installed 81.28 mm [3.2 in] above the motherboard (refer to Sections 3.3 and 6.6). The test results, for a number of samples, are reported in terms of a worst-case mean + 3σ value for thermal characterization parameter using real processors (based on the thermal test vehicle correction factors). Note: The above 81.28 mm obstruction height that is used for testing complies with the recommended obstruction height of 88.9 mm for the ATX form factor. However, it would conflict with systems in strict compliance with the ATX specification which allows an obstruction as low as 76.2 mm above the motherboard surface in Area A. ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 61 6.3 Environmental Reliability Testing 6.3.1 Structural Reliability Testing Structural reliability tests consist of unpackaged, board-level vibration and shock tests of a given thermal solution in the assembled state. The thermal solution should meet the specified thermal performance targets after these tests are conducted; however, the test conditions outlined here may differ from your own system requirements. 6.3.1.1 Random Vibration Test Procedure Duration: 10 min/axis, 3 axes Frequency Range: 5 Hz to 500 Hz Power Spectral Density (PSD) Profile: 3.13 G RMS Figure 6-4. Random Vibration PSD 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000 Frequency (Hz) PSD (g^2/Hz) 3.13GRMS (10 minutes per axis) 5 Hz 500 Hz (5, 0.01) (20, 0.02) (500, 0.02) 6.3.1.2 Shock Test Procedure Recommended performance requirement for a motherboard: • Quantity: 3 drops for + and - directions in each of 3 perpendicular axes (i.e., total 18 drops). • Profile: 50 G trapezoidal waveform, 170 in/sec minimum velocity change. • Setup: Mount sample board on test fixture. ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 62 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Figure 6-5. Shock Acceleration Curve 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Time (milliseconds) A c c e l e r a t i o n (g) 6.3.1.2.1 Recommended Test Sequence Each test sequence should start with components (i.e., motherboard, heatsink assembly, etc.) that have never been previously submitted to any reliability testing. The test sequence should always start with a visual inspection after assembly, and BIOS/CPU/Memory test (refer to Section 6.3.3). Prior to the mechanical shock & vibration test, the units under test should be preconditioned for 72 hours at 45 ºC. The purpose is to account for load relaxation during burn-in stage. The stress test should be followed by a visual inspection and then BIOS/CPU/Memory test. 6.3.1.2.2 Post-Test Pass Criteria The post-test pass criteria are: 1. No significant physical damage to the heatsink attach mechanism (including such items as clip and motherboard fasteners). 2. Heatsink must remain attached to the motherboard. 3. Heatsink remains seated and its bottom remains mated flatly against IHS surface. No visible gap between the heatsink base and processor IHS. No visible tilt of the heatsink with respect to its attach mechanism. 4. No signs of physical damage on motherboard surface due to impact of heatsink or heatsink attach mechanism. 5. No visible physical damage to the processor package. 6. Successful BIOS/Processor/memory test of post-test samples. 7. Thermal compliance testing to demonstrate that the case temperature specification can be met. ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 63 6.3.2 Power Cycling Thermal performance degradation due to TIM degradation is evaluated using power cycling testing. The test is defined by 7500 cycles for the case temperature from room temperature (~23 ºC) to the maximum case temperature defined by the thermal profile at TDP. 6.3.3 Recommended BIOS/CPU/Memory Test Procedures This test is to ensure proper operation of the product before and after environmental stresses, with the thermal mechanical enabling components assembled. The test shall be conducted on a fully operational motherboard that has not been exposed to any battery of tests prior to the test being considered. Testing setup should include the following components, properly assembled and/or connected: • Appropriate system motherboard • Processor • All enabling components, including socket and thermal solution parts • Power supply • Disk drive • Video card • DIMM • Keyboard • Monitor The pass criterion is that the system under test shall successfully complete the checking of BIOS, basic processor functions and memory, without any errors. 6.4 Material and Recycling Requirements Material shall be resistant to fungal growth. Examples of non-resistant materials include cellulose materials, animal and vegetable based adhesives, grease, oils, and many hydrocarbons. Synthetic materials such as PVC formulations, certain polyurethane compositions (e.g., polyester and some polyethers), plastics which contain organic fillers of laminating materials, paints, and varnishes also are susceptible to fungal growth. If materials are not fungal growth resistant, then MILSTD-810E, Method 508.4 must be performed to determine material performance. Material used shall not have deformation or degradation in a temperature life test. Any plastic component exceeding 25 grams must be recyclable per the European Blue Angel recycling standards. ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 64 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 6.5 Safety Requirements Heatsink and attachment assemblies shall be consistent with the manufacture of units that meet the safety standards: • UL Recognition-approved for flammability at the system level. All mechanical and thermal enabling components must be a minimum UL94V-2 approved. • CSA Certification. All mechanical and thermal enabling components must have CSA certification. • All components (in particular the heatsink fins) must meet the test requirements of UL1439 for sharp edges. • If the International Accessibility Probe specified in IEC 950 can access the moving parts of the fan, consider adding safety feature so that there is no risk of personal injury. 6.6 Geometric Envelope for Intel Reference ATX Thermal Mechanical Design Figure 7-47, Figure 7-48 and Figure 7-49 in Appendix H gives detailed reference ATX/μATX motherboard keep-out information for the reference thermal/mechanical enabling design. These drawings include height restrictions in the enabling component region. The maximum height of the reference solution above the motherboard is 71.12 mm [2.8 inches], and is compliant with the motherboard primary side height constraints defined in the ATX Specification revision 2.1 and the microATX Motherboard Interface Specification revision 1.1 found at http://www.formfactors.org. The reference solution requires a chassis obstruction height of at least 81.28 mm [3.2 inches], measured from the top of the motherboard (refer to Sections 3.3 and 6.2.4). This allows for appropriate fan inlet airflow to ensure fan performance, and therefore overall cooling solution performance. This is compliant with the recommendations found in both ATX Specification V2.1 and microATX Motherboard Interface Specification V1.1 documents. ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 65 6.7 Reference Attach Mechanism 6.7.1 Structural Design Strategy Structural design strategy for the reference design is to minimize upward board deflection during shock to help protect the LGA775 socket. The reference design uses a high clip stiffness that resists local board curvature under the heatsink, and minimizes, in particular, upward board deflection (Figure 6-6). In addition, a moderate preload provides initial downward deflection. Figure 6-6. Upward Board Deflection During Shock The target metal clip nominal stiffness is 540 N/mm [3100 lb/in]. The combined target for reference clip and fasteners nominal stiffness is 380 N/mm [2180 lb/in]. The nominal preload provided by the reference design is 191.3 N ± 44.5 N [43 lb ± 10 lb]. Note: Intel reserves the right to make changes and modifications to the design as necessary to the reference design, in particular the clip and fastener. Less curvature in region under stiff clip Shock Load ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 66 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 6.7.2 Mechanical Interface to the Reference Attach Mechanism The attach mechanism component from the reference design can be used by other 3rd party cooling solutions. The attach mechanism consists of: • A metal attach clip that interfaces with the heatsink core, see Appendix H, Figure 7-55 and Figure 7-56 for the component drawings. • Four plastic fasteners, see Appendix H, Figure 7-57, Figure 7-58, Figure 7-59 and Figure 7-60 for the component drawings. The clip is assembled to heatsink during copper core insertion, and is meant to be trapped between the core shoulder and the extrusion as shown in Figure 6-7. Figure 6-7. Reference Clip/Heatsink Assembly Core shoulder traps clip in place Clip The mechanical interface with the reference attach mechanism is defined in Figure 6-8 and Figure 6-9. Complying with the mechanical interface parameters is critical to generating a heatsink preload compliant with the minimum preload requirement given in Section 2.1.2.2. Additional requirements for the reference attach mechanism (clip and fasteners) include: • Heatsink/fan mass ≤ 550 g (i.e., total assembly mass, including clip and fasteners < 595 g • Whole assembly center of gravity ≤ 25.4 mm, measured from the top of the IHS ⎯ Whole assembly = Heatsink + Fan + Attach clip + Fasteners ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 67 Figure 6-8. Critical Parameters for Interfacing to Reference Clip Core Fin Array Fan Clip See Detail A Detail A Fin Array Clip Core 1.6 mm Figure 6-9. Critical Core Dimension R 0.40 mm max R 0.40 mm max Φ36.14 +/- 0.10 mm Gap required to avoid core surface blemish during clip assembly. Recommend 0.3 mm min. 1.00 mm min 2.596 +/- 0.10 mm Φ38.68 +/- 0.30 mm 1.00 +/- 0.10 mm Core NOTE: Dimension from the bottom of the clip to the bottom of the heatsink core (or base) should be met to enable the required load from the heatsink clip (i.e., 43 lbf nominal +/- 10 lbf) § ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information 68 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 69 7 Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) In the Intel® 965 Express Family Chipset a new control algorithm for fan speed control is being introduced. It is composed of an Intel® Management Engine (ME) in the Graphics Memory Controller Hub (GMCH) which executes the Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) algorithm and the ICH8 containing the sensor bus and fan control circuits. The ME provides integrated fan speed control in lieu of the mechanisms available in a SIO or a stand-alone ASIC. The Intel QST is time based as compared to the linear or state control used by the current generation of FSC devices. A short discussion of Intel QST will follow along with thermal solution design recommendations. For a complete discussion of programming the Intel QST in the ME please consult the Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) Configuration and Tuning Manual. Note: Fan speed control algorithms and Intel QST in particular rely on a thermal solution being compliant to the processor thermal profile. It is unlikely that any fan speed control algorithm can compensate for a non-compliant thermal solution. See Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 for thermal solution requirements that should be met before evaluating or configuring a system with Intel QST. 7.1 Intel® QST Algorithm The objective of Intel QST is to minimize the system acoustics by more closely controlling the thermal sensors to the corresponding processor or chipset device TCONTROL value. This is achieved by the use of a Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) control algorithm and a Fan Output Weighting Matrix. The PID algorithm takes into account the difference between the current temperature and the target (TCONTROL), the rate of change and direction of change to minimize the required fan speed change. The Fan Output Weighting Matrix uses the effects of each fan on a thermal sensor to minimize the required fan speed changes Figure 7-1 shows in a very simple manner how Intel QST works. See the Intel Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) Configuration and Tuning Manual for a detail discussion of the inputs and response. Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) 70 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Figure 7-1. Intel® QST Overview Fan to sensor Relationship (Output Weighting Matrix) Temperature sensing and response Calculations (PID) Fan Commands (PID) Fans Temperature Sensors Intel® QST System Response PECI / SST PWM 7.1.1 Output Weighting Matrix Intel QST provides an Output Weighting Matrix that provides a means for a single thermal sensor to affect the speed of multiple fans. An example of how the matrix could be used is if a sensor located next to the memory is sensitive to changes in both the processor heatsink fan and a 2nd fan in the system. By placing a factor in this matrix additional the Intel QST could command the processor thermal solution fan and this 2nd fan to both accelerate a small amount. At the system level these two small changes can result in a smaller change in acoustics than having a single fan respond to this sensor. 7.1.2 Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) The use of Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) control algorithms allow the magnitude of fan response to be determined based upon the difference between current temperature readings and specific temperature targets. A major advantage of a PID Algorithm is the ability to control the fans to achieve sensor temperatures much closer to the TCONTROL. Figure 7-2 is an illustration of the PID fan control algorithm. As illustrated in the figure, when the actual temperature is below the target temperature, the fan will slow down. The current FSC devices have a fixed temperature vs. PWM output relationship and miss this opportunity to achieve additional acoustic benefits. As the actual temperature starts ramping up and approaches the target temperature, the algorithm will instruct the fan to speed up gradually, but will not abruptly increase the fan speed to respond to the condition. It can allow an overshoot over the target temperature for a short period of time while ramping up the fan to bring the actual temperature to the Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 71 target temperature. As a result of its operation, the PID control algorithm can enable an acoustic-friendly platform. Figure 7-2. PID Controller Fundamentals Proportional Error Derivative (Slope) Integral (time averaged) RPM Temperature Time + dPWM - dPWM Actual Temperature Fan Speed Limit Temperature For a PID algorithm to work limit temperatures are assigned for each temperature sensor. For Intel QST, the TCONTROL for the processor and chipset are to be used as the limit temperature. The ME will measure the error, slope and rate of change using the following equations: • Proportional Error (P) = TLIMIT – TACTUAL • Integral (I) = Time averaged error • Derivative (D) = ΔTemp / ΔTime Three gain values are used to control response of algorithm. • Kp = proportional gain • Ki = Integral gain • Kd = derivative gain The Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) Configuration and Tuning Manual provides initial values for the each of the gain constants. In addition it provides a methodology to tune these gain values based on system response. Finally the fan speed change will be calculated using the following formula: ΔPWM = -P*(Kp) – I*(Ki) + D*(Kd) Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) 72 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 7.2 Board and System Implementation of Intel® QST To implement the board must be configured as shown in Figure 7-3 and listed below: • ME system (S0-S1) with Controller Link connected and powered • DRAM with Channel A DIMM 0 installed and 2MB reserved for Intel® QST FW execution • SPI Flash with sufficient space for the Intel® QST Firmware • SST-based thermal sensors to provide board thermal data for Intel® QST algorithms • Intel® QST firmware Figure 7-3. Intel® QST Platform Requirements Note: Simple Serial Transport (SST) is a single wire bus that is included in the ICH8 to provide additional thermal and voltage sensing capability to the Intel® Management Engine (ME) Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 73 Figure 7-4 shows the major connections for a typical implementation that can support processors with Digital thermal sensor or a thermal diode. In this configuration a SST Thermal Sensor has been added to read the on-die thermal diode that is in all of the processors in the 775-land LGA packages shipped before the Intel® Core™2 Duo processor. With the proper configuration information the ME can be accommodate inputs from PECI or SST for the processor socket. Additional SST sensors can be added to monitor system thermal (see Appendix F for BTX recommendations for placement). Figure 7-4. Example Acoustic Fan Speed Control Implementation Intel has engaged with a number of major manufacturers of thermal / voltage sensors to provide devices for the SST bus. Contact your Intel Field Sales representative for the current list of manufacturers and visit their web sites or local sales representatives for a part suitable for your design. Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) 74 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 7.3 Intel® QST Configuration and Tuning Initial configuration of the Intel QST is the responsibility of the board manufacturer. The SPI flash should be programmed with the hardware configuration of the motherboard and initial settings for fan control, fan monitoring, voltage and thermal monitoring. This initial data is generated using the Intel provided Configuration Tool. At the system integrator the Configuration Tool can be used again but this time to tune the Intel QST subsystem to reflect the shipping system configuration. In the tuning process the Intel QST can be modified to have the proper relationships between the installed fans and sensors in the shipping system. A Weighting Matrix Utility and Intel QST Log program are planned to assist in optimizing the fan management and achieve acoustic goal. See your Intel field sales representative for availability of these tools. 7.4 Fan Hub Thermistor and Intel® QST There is no closed loop control between Intel QST and the thermistor, but they can work in tandem to provide the maximum fan speed reduction. The BTX reference design includes a thermistor on the fan hub. This Variable Speed Fan curve will determine the maximum fan speed as a function of the inlet ambient temperature and by design provides a ΨCA sufficient to meet the thermal profile of the processor. Intel QST, by measuring the processor Digital thermal sensor will command the fan to reduce speed below the VSF curve in response to processor workload. Conversely if the processor workload increases the FSC will command the fan via the PWM duty cycle to accelerate the fan up to the limit imposed by the VSF curve. Care needs to be taken in BTX designs to ensure the fan speed at the minimum operating speed provides sufficient air flow to support the other system components. Figure 7-5. Digital Thermal Sensor and Thermistor Fan Speed (RPM) Inlet Temperature (°C) Full Speed 30 38 Min. Operating Variable Speed Fan (VSF) Curve Fan Speed Operating Range with FSC 34 Min %Fan Speed (% PWM Duty Cycle) 100 % Fan Speed (RPM) Inlet Temperature (°C) Full Speed 30 38 Min. Operating Variable Speed Fan (VSF) Curve Fan Speed Operating Range with FSC 34 Min %Fan Speed (% PWM Duty Cycle) 100 % § LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 75 Appendix A LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading A.1 LGA775 Socket Heatsink Considerations Heatsink clip load is traditionally used for: • Mechanical performance in mechanical shock and vibration ⎯ Refer to Section 6.7.1 for the information on the structural design strategy for the reference design • Thermal interface performance ⎯ Required preload depends on TIM ⎯ Preload can be low for thermal grease In addition to mechanical performance in shock and vibration and TIM performance, LGA775 socket requires a minimum heatsink preload to protect against fatigue failure of socket solder joints. Solder ball tensile stress is originally created when, after inserting a processor into the socket, the LGA775 socket load plate is actuated. In addition, solder joint shear stress is caused by coefficient of thermal expansion (CTE) mismatch induced shear loading. The solder joint compressive axial force (Faxial) induced by the heatsink preload helps to reduce the combined joint tensile and shear stress. Overall, the heatsink required preload is the minimum preload needed to meet all of the above requirements: Mechanical shock and vibration and TIM performance AND LGA775 socket protection against fatigue failure. A.2 Metric for Heatsink Preload for ATX/uATX Designs Non-Compliant with Intel® Reference Design A.2.1 Heatsink Preload Requirement Limitations Heatsink preload by itself is not an appropriate metric for solder joint force across various mechanical designs and does not take into account for example (not an exhaustive list): • Heatsink mounting hole span • Heatsink clip/fastener assembly stiffness and creep • Board stiffness and creep • Board stiffness is modified by fixtures like backing plate, chassis attach, etc. LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading 76 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Simulation shows that the solder joint force (Faxial) is proportional to the board deflection measured along the socket diagonal. The matching of Faxial required to protect the LGA775 socket solder joint in temperature cycling is equivalent to matching a target MB deflection. Therefore, the heatsink preload for LGA775 socket solder joint protection against fatigue failure can be more generally defined as the load required to create a target board downward deflection throughout the life of the product. This board deflection metric provides guidance for mechanical designs that differ from the reference design for ATX//µATX form factor. A.2.2 Motherboard Deflection Metric Definition Motherboard deflection is measured along either diagonal (refer to Figure 7-6): d = dmax – (d1 + d2)/2 d’ = dmax – (d’1 + d’2)/2 Configurations in which the deflection is measured are defined in the Table 7-1. To measure board deflection, follow industry standard procedures (such as IPC) for board deflection measurement. Height gauges and possibly dial gauges may also be used. Table 7-1. Board Deflection Configuration Definitions Configuration Parameter Processor + Socket load plate Heatsink Parameter Name d_ref yes no BOL deflection, no preload d_BOL yes yes BOL deflection with preload d_EOL yes yes EOL deflection NOTES: BOL: Beginning of Life EOL: End of Life LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 77 Figure 7-6. Board Deflection Definition d1 d2 d’1 d’2 A.2.3 Board Deflection Limits Deflection limits for the ATX/µATX form factor are: d_BOL - d_ref≥ 0.09 mm and d_EOL - d_ref ≥ 0.15 mm And d’_BOL – d’_ref≥ 0.09 mm and d_EOL’ – d_ref’ ≥ 0.15 mm NOTES: 1. The heatsink preload must remain within the static load limits defined in the processor datasheet at all times. 2. Board deflection should not exceed motherboard manufacturer specifications. LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading 78 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines A.2.4 Board Deflection Metric Implementation Example This section is for illustration only, and relies on the following assumptions: • 72 mm x 72 mm hole pattern of the reference design • Board stiffness = 900 lb/in at BOL, with degradation that simulates board creep over time ⎯ Though these values are representative, they may change with selected material and board manufacturing process. Check with your motherboard vendor. • Clip stiffness assumed constant – No creep. Using Figure 7-7, the heatsink preload at beginning of life is defined to comply with d_EOL – d_ref = 0.15 mm depending on clip stiffness assumption. Note that the BOL and EOL preload and board deflection differ. This is a result of the creep phenomenon. The example accounts for the creep expected to occur in the motherboard. It assumes no creep to occur in the clip. However, there is a small amount of creep accounted for in the plastic fasteners. This situation is somewhat similar to the reference design. The impact of the creep to the board deflection is a function of the clip stiffness: • The relatively compliant clips store strain energy in the clip under the BOL preload condition and tend to generate increasing amounts of board deflection as the motherboard creeps under exposure to time and temperature. • In contrast, the stiffer clips stores very little strain energy, and therefore do not generate substantial additional board deflection through life. NOTES: 1. Board and clip creep modify board deflection over time and depends on board stiffness, clip stiffness, and selected materials. 2. Designers must define the BOL board deflection that will lead to the correct end of life board deflection LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 79 Figure 7-7. Example: Defining Heatsink Preload Meeting Board Deflection Limit A.2.5 Additional Considerations Intel recommends to design to {d_BOL - d_ref = 0.15mm} at BOL when EOL conditions are not known or difficult to assess. The following information is given for illustration only. It is based on the reference keep-out, assuming there is no fixture that changes board stiffness: d_ref is expected to be 0.18 mm on average, and be as high as 0.22 mm As a result, the board should be able to deflect 0.37 mm minimum at BOL Additional deflection as high as 0.09 mm may be necessary to account for additional creep effects impacting the board/clip/fastener assembly. As a result, designs could see as much as 0.50 mm total downward board deflection under the socket. In addition to board deflection, other elements need to be considered to define the space needed for the downward board total displacement under load, like the potential interference of through-hole mount component pin tails of the board with a mechanical fixture on the back of the board. NOTES: 1. The heatsink preload must remain below the maximum load limit of the package at all times (Refer to processor datasheet) 2. Board deflection should not exceed motherboard manufacturer specifications. LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading 80 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines A.2.5.1 Motherboard Stiffening Considerations To protect LGA775 socket solder joint, designers need to drive their mechanical design to: • Allow downward board deflection to put the socket balls in a desirable force state to protect against fatigue failure of socket solder joint (refer to Sections A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.2.3. • Prevent board upward bending during mechanical shock event • Define load paths that keep the dynamic load applied to the package within specifications published in the processor datasheet Limiting board deflection may be appropriate in some situations like: • Board bending during shock • Board creep with high heatsink preload However, the load required to meet the board deflection recommendation (refer to Section A.2.3) with a very stiff board may lead to heatsink preloads exceeding package maximum load specification. For example, such a situation may occur when using a backing plate that is flush with the board in the socket area, and prevents the board to bend underneath the socket. A.3 Heatsink Selection Guidelines Evaluate carefully heatsinks coming with motherboard stiffening devices (like backing plates), and conduct board deflection assessments based on the board deflection metric. Solutions derived from the reference design comply with the reference heatsink preload, for example: • The Boxed Processor • The reference design (D60188-001 and E18764-001) Intel will collaborate with vendors participating in its third party test house program to evaluate third party solutions. Vendor information now is available in Intel® Core™2 Duo Processor Support Components webpage www.intel.com/go/thermal_Core2Duo . § Heatsink Clip Load Metrology Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 81 Appendix B Heatsink Clip Load Metrology B.1 Overview This section describes a procedure for measuring the load applied by the heatsink/clip/fastener assembly on a processor package. This procedure is recommended to verify the preload is within the design target range for a design, and in different situations. For example: • Heatsink preload for the LGA775 socket • Quantify preload degradation under bake conditions. Note: This document reflects the current metrology used by Intel. Intel is continuously exploring new ways to improve metrology. Updates will be provided later as this document is revised as appropriate. B.2 Test Preparation B.2.1 Heatsink Preparation Three load cells are assembled into the base of the heatsink under test, in the area interfacing with the processor Integrated Heat Spreader (IHS), using load cells equivalent to those listed in Section B.2.2. To install the load cells, machine a pocket in the heatsink base, as shown in Figure 7-8 and Figure 7-9. The load cells should be distributed evenly, as close as possible to the pocket walls. Apply wax around the circumference of each load cell and the surface of the pocket around each cell to maintain the load cells in place during the heatsink installation on the processor and motherboard (Refer to Figure 7-9). The depth of the pocket depends on the height of the load cell used for the test. It is necessary that the load cells protrude out of the heatsink base. However, this protrusion should be kept minimal, as it will create additional load by artificially raising the heatsink base. The measurement offset depends on the whole assembly stiffness (i.e. motherboard, clip, fastener, etc.). For example, the reference design clip and fasteners assembly stiffness is around 380 N/mm [2180 lb/in]. In that case, a protrusion of 0.038 mm [0.0015”] will create an extra load of 15 N [3.3 lb]. Figure 7-10 shows an example using the reference design. Note: When optimizing the heatsink pocket depth, the variation of the load cell height should also be taken into account to make sure that all load cells protrude equally from the heatsink base. It may be useful to screen the load cells prior to installation to minimize variation. Heatsink Clip Load Metrology 82 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Remarks: Alternate Heatsink Sample Preparation As mentioned above, making sure that the load cells have minimum protrusion out of the heatsink base is paramount to meaningful results. An alternate method to make sure that the test setup will measure loads representative of the non-modified design is: • Machine the pocket in the heat sink base to a depth such that the tips of the load cells are just flush with the heat sink base • Then machine back the heatsink base by around 0.25 mm [0.01”], so that the load cell tips protrude beyond the base. Proceeding this way, the original stack height of the heatsink assembly should be preserved. This should not affect the stiffness of the heatsink significantly. Figure 7-8. Load Cell Installation in Machined Heatsink Base Pocket – Bottom View Package IHS Outline (Top Surface) Load Cells Heatsink Base Pocket Diameter ~ 29 mm [~1.15”] Heatsink Clip Load Metrology Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 83 Figure 7-9. Load Cell Installation in Machined Heatsink Base Pocket – Side View Figure 7-10. Preload Test Configuration Load Cells (3x) Preload Fixture (copper core with milled out pocket) Wax to maintain load cell in position during heatsink installation Height of pocket ~ height of selected load cell Load cell protrusion (Note: to be optimized depending on assembly stiffness) Heatsink Clip Load Metrology 84 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines B.2.2 Typical Test Equipment For the heatsink clip load measurement, use equivalent test equipment to the one listed Table 7-2. Table 7-2. Typical Test Equipment Item Description Part Number (Model) Load cell Notes: 1, 5 Honeywell*-Sensotec* Model 13 subminiature load cells, compression only Select a load range depending on load level being tested. www.sensotec.com AL322BL Data Logger (or scanner) Notes: 2, 3, 4 Vishay* Measurements Group Model 6100 scanner with a 6010A strain card (one card required per channel). Model 6100 NOTES: 1. Select load range depending on expected load level. It is usually better, whenever possible, to operate in the high end of the load cell capability. Check with your load cell vendor for further information. 2. Since the load cells are calibrated in terms of mV/V, a data logger or scanner is required to supply 5 volts DC excitation and read the mV response. An automated model will take the sensitivity calibration of the load cells and convert the mV output into pounds. 3. With the test equipment listed above, it is possible to automate data recording and control with a 6101-PCI card (GPIB) added to the scanner, allowing it to be connected to a PC running LabVIEW* or Vishay's StrainSmart* software. 4. IMPORTANT: In addition to just a zeroing of the force reading at no applied load, it is important to calibrate the load cells against known loads. Load cells tend to drift. Contact your load cell vendor for calibration tools and procedure information. 5. When measuring loads under thermal stress (bake for example), load cell thermal capability must be checked, and the test setup must integrate any hardware used along with the load cell. For example, the Model 13 load cells are temperature compensated up to 71 °C, as long as the compensation package (spliced into the load cell's wiring) is also placed in the temperature chamber. The load cells can handle up to 121 °C (operating), but their uncertainty increases according to 0.02% rdg/°F. B.3 Test Procedure Examples The following sections give two examples of load measurement. However, this is not meant to be used in mechanical shock and vibration testing. Any mechanical device used along with the heatsink attach mechanism will need to be included in the test setup (i.e., back plate, attach to chassis, etc.). Prior to any test, make sure that the load cell has been calibrated against known loads, following load cell vendor’s instructions. Heatsink Clip Load Metrology Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 85 B.3.1 Time-Zero, Room Temperature Preload Measurement 1. Pre-assemble mechanical components on the board as needed prior to mounting the motherboard on an appropriate support fixture that replicate the board attach to a target chassis • For example: standard ATX board should sit on ATX compliant stand-offs. If the attach mechanism includes fixtures on the back side of the board, those must be included, as the goal of the test is to measure the load provided by the actual heatsink mechanism. 2. Install relevant test vehicle (TTV, processor) in the socket 3. Assemble the heatsink reworked with the load cells to motherboard as shown for the reference design example in Figure 7-10, and actuate attach mechanism. 4. Collect continuous load cell data at 1 Hz for the duration of the test. A minimum time to allow the load cell to settle is generally specified by the load vendors (often of order of 3 minutes). The time zero reading should be taken at the end of this settling time. 5. Record the preload measurement (total from all three load cells) at the target time and average the values over 10 seconds around this target time as well, i.e. in the interval , for example over [target time – 5 seconds ; target time + 5 seconds]. B.3.2 Preload Degradation under Bake Conditions This section describes an example of testing for potential clip load degradation under bake conditions. 1. Preheat thermal chamber to target temperature (45 ºC or 85 ºC for example) 2. Repeat time-zero, room temperature preload measurement 3. Place unit into preheated thermal chamber for specified time 4. Record continuous load cell data as follows: • Sample rate = 0.1 Hz for first 3 hrs • Sample rate = 0.01 Hz for the remainder of the bake test 5. Remove assembly from thermal chamber and set into room temperature conditions 6. Record continuous load cell data for next 30 minutes at sample rate of 1 Hz. § Heatsink Clip Load Metrology 86 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Thermal Interface Management Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 87 Appendix C Thermal Interface Management To optimize a heatsink design, it is important to understand the impact of factors related to the interface between the processor and the heatsink base. Specifically, the bond line thickness, interface material area and interface material thermal conductivity should be managed to realize the most effective thermal solution. C.1 Bond Line Management Any gap between the processor integrated heat spreader (IHS) and the heatsink base degrades thermal solution performance. The larger the gap between the two surfaces, the greater the thermal resistance. The thickness of the gap is determined by the flatness and roughness of both the heatsink base and the integrated heat spreader, plus the thickness of the thermal interface material (for example thermal grease) used between these two surfaces and the clamping force applied by the heatsink attach clip(s). C.2 Interface Material Area The size of the contact area between the processor and the heatsink base will impact the thermal resistance. There is, however, a point of diminishing returns. Unrestrained incremental increases in thermal interface material area do not translate to a measurable improvement in thermal performance. C.3 Interface Material Performance Two factors impact the performance of the interface material between the processor and the heatsink base: • Thermal resistance of the material • Wetting/filling characteristics of the material Thermal resistance is a description of the ability of the thermal interface material to transfer heat from one surface to another. The higher the thermal resistance, the less efficient the interface material is at transferring heat. The thermal resistance of the interface material has a significant impact on the thermal performance of the overall thermal solution. The higher the thermal resistance, the larger the temperature drop is across the interface and the more efficient the thermal solution (heatsink, fan) must be to achieve the desired cooling. The wetting or filling characteristic of the thermal interface material is its ability, under the load applied by the heatsink retention mechanism, to spread and fill the gap between the processor and the heatsink. Since air is an extremely poor thermal conductor, the more completely the interface material fills the gaps, the lower the temperature drops across the interface. In this case, thermal interface material area also becomes significant; the larger the desired thermal interface material area, the higher the force required to spread the thermal interface material. § Thermal Interface Management 88 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Case Temperature Reference Metrology Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 89 Appendix DCase Temperature Reference Metrology D.1 Objective and Scope This appendix defines a reference procedure for attaching a thermocouple to the IHS of a 775-land LGA package for TC measurement. This procedure takes into account the specific features of the 775-land LGA package and of the LGA775 socket for which it is intended. The recommended equipment for the reference thermocouple installation, including tools and part numbers are also provided. In addition a video Thermocouple Attach Using Solder – Video CD-ROM is available that shows the process in real time. The following supplier can do machining the groove and attaching a thermocouple to the IHS followed by the reference procedure. The supplier is listed the following table as a convenience to Intel’s general customers and the list may be subject to change without notice. Supplier Contact Phone Email Address THERM-X OF CALIFORNIA Ernesto B Valencia 510-441-7566 Ext. 242 ernestov@ther m-x.com 1837 Whipple Road, Hayward, Ca 94544 D.2 Supporting Test Equipment To apply the reference thermocouple attach procedure, it is recommended to use the equipment (or equivalent) given in the following table. Item Description Part Number Measurement and Output Microscope Olympus* Light microscope or equivalent SZ-40 DMM Digital Multi Meter for resistance measurement Fluke 79 Series Thermal Meter Hand held thermocouple meter Multiple Vendors Solder Station (see note 1 for ordering information) Heater Block Heater assembly to reflow solder on IHS 30330 Heater WATLOW120V 150W Firerod 0212G G1A38- L12 Transformer Superior Powerstat transformer 05F857 Case Temperature Reference Metrology 90 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Item Description Part Number Miscellaneous Hardware Solder Indium Corp. of America Alloy 57BI / 42SN / 1AG 0.010 Diameter 52124 Flux Indium Corp. of America 5RMA Loctite* 498 Adhesive Super glue w/thermal characteristics 49850 Adhesive Accelerator Loctite* 7452 for fast glue curing 18490 Kapton* Tape For holding thermocouple in place Not Available Thermocouple Omega *,36 gauge, “T” Type (see note 2 for ordering information) OSK2K1280/5SR TC-TT-T-36-72 Calibration and Control Ice Point Cell Omega*, stable 0 ºC temperature source for calibration and offset TRCIII Hot Point Cell Omega *, temperature source to control and understand meter slope gain CL950-A-110 NOTES: 1. The Solder Station consisting of the Heater Block, Heater, Press and Transformer are available from Jemelco Engineering 480-804-9514 2. This part number is a custom part with the specified insulation trimming and packaging requirements necessary for quality thermocouple attachment, See Figure 7-11. Order from Omega Anthony Alvarez, Direct phone (203) 359-7671, Direct fax (203) 968- 7142, E-Mail: aalvarez@omega.com Figure 7-11. Omega Thermocouple Case Temperature Reference Metrology Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 91 D.3 Thermal Calibration and Controls It is recommended that full and routine calibration of temperature measurement equipment be performed before attempting to perform temperature case measurement. Intel recommends checking the meter probe set against known standards. This should be done at 0 ºC (using ice bath or other stable temperature source) and at an elevated temperature, around 80 ºC (using an appropriate temperature source). Wire gauge and length also should be considered as some less expensive measurement systems are heavily impacted by impedance. There are numerous resources available throughout the industry to assist with implementation of proper controls for thermal measurements. NOTES: 1. It is recommended to follow company standard procedures and wear safety items like glasses for cutting the IHS and gloves for chemical handling. 2. Please ask your Intel field sales representative if you need assistance to groove and/or install a thermocouple according to the reference process. D.4 IHS Groove Cut a groove in the package IHS; see the drawings given in Figure 7-12 and Figure 7-13. The groove orientation in Figure 7-12 is toward the IHS notch to allow the thermocouple wire to be routed under the socket lid. This will protect the thermocouple from getting damaged or pinched when removing and installing the heatsink (see Figure 7-37). Case Temperature Reference Metrology 92 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines Figure 7-12. 775-LAND LGA Package Reference Groove Drawing at 6 o’clock Exit Case Temperature Reference Metrology Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 93 Figure 7-13. 775-LAND LGA Package Reference Groove Drawing at 3 o’clock Exit (Old Drawing) Case Temperature Reference Metrology 94 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines The orientation of the groove at 6 o’clock exit relative to the package pin 1 indicator (gold triangle in one corner of the package) is shown in Figure 7-14 for the 775-Land LGA package IHS. Figure 7-14. IHS Groove at 6 o’clock Exit on the 775-LAND LGA Package When the processor is installed in the LGA775 socket, the groove is parallel to the socket load lever, and is toward the IHS notch as shown Figure 7-15. Figure 7-15. IHS Groove at 6 o’clock Exit Orientation Relative to the LGA775 Socket Select a machine shop that is capable of holding drawing specified tolerances. IHS groove geometry is critical for repeatable placement of the thermocouple bead, ensuring precise thermal measurements. The specified dimensions minimize the impact of the groove on the IHS under the socket load. A larger groove may cause the IHS to warp under the socket load such that it does not represent the performance of an ungrooved IHS on production packages. Inspect parts for compliance to specifications before accepting from machine shop. Pin1 indicator IHS Groove Case Temperature Reference Metrology Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 95 D.5 Thermocouple Attach Procedure The procedure to attach a thermocouple with solder takes about 15 minutes to complete. Before proceeding turn on the solder block heater, as it can take up to 30 minutes to reach the target temperature of 153 – 155 °C. Note: To avoid damage to the processor ensure the IHS temperature does not exceed 155 °C. As a complement to the written procedure a video Thermocouple Attach Using Solder – Video CD-ROM is available. D.5.1 Thermocouple Conditioning and Preparation 7. Use a calibrated thermocouple as specified in Sections D.2 and D.3. 8. Under a microscope verify the thermocouple insulation meets the quality requirements. The insulation should be about 1/16 inch (0.062 ± 0.030) from the end of the bead (Figure 7-16). Figure 7-16. Inspection of Insulation on Thermocouple 9. Measure the thermocouple resistance by holding both contacts on the connector on one probe and the tip of thermocouple to the other probe of the DMM (measurement should be about~3.0 ohms for 36-gauge type T thermocouple).